Canon Mvx200 Mvx250i-Sm

Video Product
MVX250i E
MVX200i E
MVX200 E
No. D17-8216, 8233 Digital Video Camera iPAL
D17-8236
Canon Inc.
Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
c CANON INC. 2004 First Edition : Mar. 2004
First Print : Mar. 2004
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1 Main Features ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1-1 Easy Direct Button ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
1-1-2 DV Messenger 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1-3 Function and Performance List --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
2. Technical Explanation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
2-1 Design ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
2-1-1 Design Concept-1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
2-1-2 Design Concept-2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E ------------------------ 11
2-2 18 zoom lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
2-2-1 Features of 18 lens -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
2-2-2 New technologies and new functions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13
2-3-1 Direct Print function -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
2-3-2 Direct Transfer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
2-3-2-1 Startup ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15
2-3-2-2 ALL IMAGES ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
2-3-2-3 NEW IMAGES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
2-3-2-4 TRANSFER ORDERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
2-3-2-5 SELECT & TRANSFER --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
2-3-2-6 WALL PAPER ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
3. Performance ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
5-1 Camera mode --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
5-2 VCR mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43
5-3 Card / Camera mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
5-4 Card Playback mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
5-4-1 Still image Playback -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
5-4-3 Direct printing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52
5-5 Menu Display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
5-6 Card-related screen displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
5-7 Direct print setting screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
5-8 Print designations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
5-9 Warning displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
1. Product Overview
1-1 Main Features
1-1-1 Easy Direct Button
Easy Direct Button

(Print/Share Button)
Enables Easy Printing and PC File Transfer
The button turns on when the camcorder is connected to a printer or PC
The light turns on to indicate the button to press next for easy operation
Print setup information is

Printer Lights up! displayed for 6 seconds
Pressing the Direct button

starts printing
PC
Visually check that

the camcorder is con- Pressing the Direct button
nected correctly starts file transfer to PC
Connection to The Transfer menu is

Printer / PC displayed
1
1-1-2 DV Messenger 2
A peer-to-peer (P2P) type bidirectional communications software using DV (Digital Video Camcorder)
Allows bidirectional sending of audio/video content and messages (text/images) via the Internet.
Basic specifications are compatible with Windows Messenger.
Allows control (camera zoom and focus, VCR playback and stop, access to the memory card) of the digital video camcorder
from a remote PC.
Remote home monitoring camera using the web camera function (enables monitoring of your home from a remote location)
Internet
IEEE1394 IEEE1394
2
1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart
Specifications MVX250i E MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Zoom mag. Tape optical 18 / digital 360 optical 14 / digital 280
Card optical 18 / digital 72 optical 14 / digital 56
CCD 1/4.5-inch interlaced CCD (Total pixels : Approx. 1.33 megapixels)
(Effective pixels Tape motion video : Approx. 860,000 pixels
Card still image: Approx. 1,230,000 pixels)
Image stabilizer Electronic image stabilizer (during tape mode only)
Monitor 2.5-inch 123,000 pixel LCD monitor
EVF 0.33-inch 113,000 pixel color viewfinder
Memory card function (SD memory card, MultiMediaCard)
Card Still images Progressive Photo
recording (1024768, 640480)
Card motion video
AVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monaural))
recording
USB file transfer
Direct print (Support for Direct Print, Bubble Jet Direct, and PictBridge)
File transfer IEEE1394 / USB
Streaming IEEE1394
USB compatibility (USB 2.0 Full Speed class with PTP support)
Accessory shoe (Advanced accessory shoe not supported)
Auxiliary illumination White LED (Night+ : always on)
function (Super Night : Lights in accordance
with brightness)
Night mode (Night, Night+, Super Night) (Night)
High-resolution 16:9 (Letterbox display)
END search
S-Video terminal
DV, analog line inputs
Microphone terminal *1
Wide attachment lens

supplied
Remote controller
supplied battery NB-2LH (MVX250i E only is supplied with BP-2L14)
*1 : Not applicable to MVX200 E
3
1-3 Function and Performance List
Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Camera
Image sensing Image size 1/4.5-inch CCD
device System (filter) Interlacing (color correction filter)
Total pixels Approx. 1.33 megapixels
Effective pixels Tape Approx. 860,000 pixels
Card Approx. 1,230,000 pixels
Lens Optical zoom magnification, Tape MVX250i E : 18 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 817.2 mm)
focal length MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 45.4 to 635.6 mm)
(35mm equivalent) Card MVX250i E : 18 3.5 to 63 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 682.2 mm)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 14 3.5 to 49 mm (Approx. 37.9 to 530.6 mm)
Digital zoom Magnification Tape MVX250i E : 72 / 360 252 mm / 1,260 mm
magnification (Approx. 3,269 mm / 16,344 mm equivalent)
focal length MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 / 280 196 mm / 980 mm
(35mm equivalent) (Approx. 2,542 mm / 12,712 mm equivalent)
Card MVX250i E : 72 Approx. 252 mm (Approx. 2,728.8 mm equivalent)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 Approx. 196 mm
(Approx. 2,122.4 mm equivalent)
System Tape CCD readout
Card CCD readout
F number Tape MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1
Card MVX250i E : F1.8 to 3.4
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : F1.8 to 3.1
Aperture leaves (Number of leaves) 2 leaves
Zoom speed Variable
Filter diameter 34mm P0.5
Noise reduction Camera Tape Either CCD-NR or Y/C-NR
Motion
Card video None
Still
image Chroma-only, median filter
Recorder C-NR system
Minimum Night mode 1.5 lx
illumination Low Light mode 3.0 lx
Auto mode(when auto slow shutter is selected) 6.0 lx
Image Image stabilization system Tape Electronic system
stabilization Card None
Sensing method Angular velocity sensing
4

Shooting functions
AE mode Program AE Tape (Full Auto)
(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night,
Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only))
Card (Full Auto)
(Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Surf & Snow, Low Light, Night,
Night+*, Super Night * (* : MVX250i E only))
Photometric Center-bottom-weighted average Tape Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night*
system (* : MVX250i E only)
Evaluation photometry (128- Tape 128 segments (Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow (Sand & Snow mode))
&
segments) + All area photometry Card
Evaluative photometry (128- Card Full Auto, Auto, Sports, Portrait, Low Light, Night, Night+*, Super Night*
segments) (* : MVX250i E only)
Exposure AE lock (Except Green mode)
adjustment AE shift
Exposure correction 11 steps
(Disabled in Green mode, Spotlight mode, and Surf & Snow mode)
Manual gain setting
Back light correction
Shutter speed Auto mode Tape 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/50 to 1/500 sec
(with auto slow shutter OFF)
Card 1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON), 1/25 to 1/250 sec
(with auto slow shutter OFF)
Auto Tape 6 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000 sec)
(Shutter speed setting) Card 3 levels (1/50, 1/120, 1/250 sec)
Low Light 1/12.5 sec (Low Light mode)
Night, Night+*, Super Night* Tape 1/6 to 1/500 sec
(* MVX250i E only) Card 1/2 to 1/250 sec
Iris control Auto iris
Auxiliary light Flash
Video light
White LED (MVX250i E only)
Image quality Color gain adjustment
adjustment Hue adjustment
(Custom preset) Sharpness adjustment
Setup adjustment
White balance Auto
Preset Outdoor, Indoor
Systems TTL, 128 segments
Focus Mode AF/MF, forced infinity
Manual focus SET button operation
16:9 Recording system Tape High image

quality 16:9
Card
Area marker display
5

Shooting functions
Digital fade Tape Motion video Auto Fade, Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
(Activated by pressing Start/Stop button)
Still image
Card Motion video
Still image
Digital effect Tape Motion video/still image Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card Motion video/still image Black & White
Card mix Tape Motion video/still image Card Lumi key, Card Chroma key, Camera Chroma key, Animation
Card Motion video/still image
Multi-screen Tape Motion video/still image Supported (Disabled in Night mode, Night+ mode, and Super Night mode)
Card Motion video/still image
Capture speed Shutter speed 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (6 fields), Slow (8 fields)
Shutter speed < 1/25sec Manual, Fast (4 fields), Normal (8 fields), Slow (12 fields)
Screen segments 4 (2 2) / 9 (3 3) / 16 (4 4)
Motion video Tape miniDV (SP, LP)
shooting Card Image size 320 240, 160 120 dots
(MVX250i E) Shooting SDC-8M 320 240 dots (continuous, approx. 20 sec)
time 160 120 dots (continuous, approx. 50 sec)
MMC-8M 320 240 dots (continuous, approx. 10 sec)
160 120 dots (continuous, approx. 30 sec) per shot
Still image Tape
recording Card Recording system Progressive photo
Recording image Frame image
Single image
Continuous shooting (Fast, Normal)
AEB
Image size 1280 960, 640 480
Image quality Super Fine, Fine, Normal
Photo Form Dedicated still image button (in card mode only)
button Pressed
(Only during recording standby)
halfway down
Card review (image setting menu obtained by pressing photo button + SET button)
Flash photography (with VFL-1 (sold separately) attached (MVX250i E only)
Negative-positive reversal
Built-in Video light (MVX250i E only, equipped with white LED (lights in
Super Night mode, Night+ mode))
(VL-3 support in MVX250i E only (Advanced accessory shoe))
Zebra pattern
Color bar display
Self-timer 10 sec / Remote controller : 2 seconds
Interval timer
Clearscan
Recorded image size and file format VGA : 640(H) 480 (V), SXGA : 1280(H) 960(V) / JPEG
Memory card SD memory card, MultiMediaCard
REC Search
REC Review
Standby switch
Power save (After five minutes in Recording pause) Power shutoff
6

Shooting functions
Displayed text recording
Audio 16-bit 2-ch (48KHz)
12-bit 4-ch (32 kHz) Simultaneous 4-channel recording not possible
Wind screen With AUTO/OFF switch (built-in microphone only)
EVF Size 0.33-inch (TFT color RGB delta arrangement)
Pixels 113,000 pixels
Brightness adjustment
Color adjustment
Movable
LCD monitor Screen size 2.5-inch
Pixels 123,000 pixels
Brightness adjustment
Movable mirror shooting supported
VCR
Playback Frame playback Forward / Reverse
system Slow playback Forward / Reverse
2X SP playback Forward / Reverse
1X SP playback Forward / Reverse
Cue / review 11.5 speed
Search Photo search
Date search
Index search
End search
Special playback Playback zoom (5 zoom) (In tape playback and card still image playback)
effects D. effects Tape Art, Black & White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror
Card Black & White
D. fade Tape Auto fade, Wipe, Corner wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zig Zag, Beam, Tide
Card
Multi screen 4, 9 or 16 screens (Tape only)
Data code display Time and Date display
Card Slide show
Index playback
(6-screen playback)
Card fast forward / rewind Card jump
Audio dubbing (Model MVX200 E : built-in microphone only)
AV insert
Zero set memory
Editing functions Simple editing
Special effects
7

System
Interface Microphone input (MVX250i E only)
(terminal) Headphone output (Also serves as AV terminal)
DV terminal Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.)
S-Video terminal Input / output. (However, output only on MVX200 E models.)
AV terminal Input/output, 3.5mm jack (also serves as headphone terminal.
However, output only on MVX200 E models.)
Editing terminals (LANC terminal)
USB port
(mini-B Receptacle USB 2.0 Full Speed)
Memory card file transfer
Analog DV signal conversion (excluding model MVX200 E)
Direct printer Camera direct (CP-10, CP-100)
Photo direct (PIXUS 50i, PIXUS BJ 895PD, PIXUS BJ 535PD)
PictBridge (CP-200/PC-300, Pixus 990i and other PictBridge compatible bubble-
jet printers)
My Camera Startup screen creation
settings Startup screen selection
Startup sound
Shutter sound
Self-timer sound
World clock (Date display (Japanese, North American or European format can be
selected))
Text titles
Speaker
Confirmation beep
Tally lamp
Remote control cord Supports 1 and 2,
Accessory shoe (Advanced accessory shoe compatible MVX250i E model only)
Video ID (ID2 : NTSC only)
Recording media Tape miniDV, SP,LP
Card SD memory card, MultiMediaCard
Illuminated keys
Custom keys
Night mode key
DV control
Internal battery charging (CA-570 connection)
Backup power Lithium coin battery (CR1616)
Battery pack power NB-2L, NB-2LH, BP-2L12, and BP-2L14 lithium ion batteries
8
External View
Fig. 1
9
2. Technical Explanation
2-1 Design
2-1-1 Design Concept-1
<Parallel Layout Design>

New concept design with short height Size about
40%
smaller than the MVX3i E
2-1-2 Design Concept-2
<Distinctive Body Design>

The design has a distinctive character line cross-
ing diagonally over the lens section.
In this design, a brilliant metallic coating cre-
ates remarkable highlights and shadows under
light for creating a stunning impression.
<Brilliant Metallic Color>

Metallic colors are used for the cassette cover
side. Metal and chrome parts are also used for
the lens ring and Megapixel badge to provide a
sense of refinement.
<Round Grip>
In addition to the round-shaped grip for enabling
a stronger grip, the finger grips use elastomer
for allowing a firm hold.
<Easy Direct Buttons>

This is the first DVC to use the Easy Direct
Buttons. This makes printing as easy as press-
ing a button.
10
2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
Model MVX250i E
Model MVX200i E, MVX200 E

In comparison to the lens barrel section,
Grip top/Front lens Side/Side connector alow-contrast two-tone design is used with
cover are molded alow-brightness, brilliant silver metallic finish.
Gray color (finish is not used for cost reasons)
Bluish, high-brilliance metallic finish
11
2-2 18 zoom lens
2-2-1 Features of 18 lens

Highest zoom ratio in a mechanical unit
Extremely high cost-performance ratio
2-2-2 New technologies and new functions

A two-sided aspherical lens and high-refraction glass are arranged efficiently to minimize the size despite an increased number of
lenses.
The movement amount of the compensator near the tele end was also increased to reduce the load on the variator and achieve an
efficient zoom ratio over the entire short length.
Lens incorporated in MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
Lens incorporated in MVX3i E
12
2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button)
2-3-1 Direct Print function

The Easy Direct Button enables you to immediately start printing by simply connecting the video camera to a Camera Direct compatible
printer and pressing the button while it is lit.
(1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer.
(2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode.
(3)Once the connection is made with the printer ( SETUP or other indicator is displayed), the button lights up blue. Press
the button to start printing.
(1)
Off
Direct printer connection

(2)
Press the button
On
Press the SETUP button (Press the MENU button)

(3)
Press the SETUP button
Flashing
Off
* When still images are displayed for the first time after
connection, the setting status appears over the screen (2)
for six seconds (figure at right).
Button operation guide

Button lights up : Indicates button operation is possible.
Button turns off : Indicates button operation is not possible.
Button flashing : Indicates printing is in progress.
The procedure for previous models is shown below.

(1)Connect the printer, and then turn on the printer.
(2)Set the video camera to Card Playback mode.
(3)Once the connection is made with the printer ( SETUP is displayed), press the SETUP button.
(4)This changes to the Print Setting screen. Check that you are ready to start printing, and then press the SETUP button to start
printing.
With the Easy Direct Button, step (3) is eliminated for even easier searching and printing of multiple images.
13
2-3-2 Direct Transfer

The Direct Transfer function uses the Easy Direct Button [ ] to easily transfer
images to a computer.
When the video camera is connected to a computer and set to Card Playback mode, the
Transfer menu is displayed on the video camera LCD screen. The user simply selects the
desired option from the menu and presses the Direct button to easily transfer the image to
the computer.
ZoomBrowser 4.6, which supports Direct Transfer, must already be installed on the computer.
The supported OS are Windows XP, Windows 2000, Windows ME, and Windows 98 (Macintosh is not supported).
The transferred image is saved in a folder designated by ZoomBrowser.
The available files types for transfer are JPEG and Motion-JPEG (MPEG-4 is not supported).
(Note that only JPEG files can be transferred in the PC Wallpaper option.)
The Transfer menu has the following five options.

ALL IMAGES... : This transfers all images recorded in the memory card
to the computer.
NEW IMAGES... : This transfers images in the memory card that have
not been already transferred.
TRANSFER ORDERS... : This uses the DPOF function to transfer only images
with a check mark. Note that the images need to be
designated for sending at the Send Designation Set-
ting screen beforehand.
SELECT &TRANSFER... : The user checks the images one at a time before transferring.
WALLPAPER... : This enables the user to check the image one at a time before transferring and setting as the
computers wallpaper in realtime.
14
2-3-2-1 Startup
Set the video camera to Card Playback mode, and then connect to a computer with a USB cable.
Direct Transfer does not start unless a memory card is loaded.
After Direct Transfer is started, the image that is displayed first is determined by the following conditions.
1. No Image Warning is displayed if there are no recorded images in the memory card.
2. The Menu screen is displayed when the option that was last executed is not recorded, such as when using for the first time.
3. If ALL IMAGES , NEW IMAGES or TRANSFER ORDERS is recorded as the last executed option, the Direct
Transfer menu screen is displayed.
4. If SELECT &TRANSFER or WALL PAPER is recorded as the last executed option, the SELECT &TRANSFER
screen is displayed.
Function Operation Description

The computer and
video camera are
Startup This proceeds to the Menu screen.
connected by a
USB cable.
Startup condition 4 Startup conditions 2 and 3 Button turns off
Menu screen
ALL IMAGES : See 2.3.2.2 .
NEW IMAGES : See 2.3.2.3 .
TRANSFER ORDERS : See 2.3.2.4 .
SELECT &TRANSFER : See 2.3.2.5 .
WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6
Button lights up
Select Image screen
SELECT &TRANSFER : See 2.3.2.5

WALL PAPER : See 2.3.2.6
Button lights up
No Image Warning screen
15
2-3-2-2 ALL IMAGES

This transfers all images in the camera and saves them to the computer.
Menu screen
Move the [SET] button
Transfer all up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer
images images, and then press screen.
down the [SET] button.
Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and
up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is
images, and then press displayed.
[ ]
[SET] down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as
button. the selected function.
Confirm Transfer screen Button lights up
Cancel Move the [SET] button This cancels the selected function and
up and down to select returns to the Menu screen.
images, and then press This performs the transfer and proceeds to
OK down the [SET] button. the Transfer in Progress screen.
Cancel OK
Button turns off
Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar)

Press down the [SET] This cancels the transfer and returns to the
Cancel
or [MENU] button. Menu screen.
Button turns off

Finish Transfer or Cancel
The transfer progress is based on the Number of images for which transfer was
completed/Total number of images to be transferred.
If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
Return to Menu screen
16
2-3-2-3 NEW IMAGES

All untransferred images are transferred and saved to the computer.
Menu screen
Transfer
up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer
untransferred
images, and then press screen.
images
down the [SET] button.
[ ] [SET] down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as
Confirm Transfer screen Button lights up
Cancel OK
Button lights up

Cancel
Button lights up
Finish Transfer or Cancel If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
17
2-3-2-4 TRANSFER ORDERS

All images designated for sending are transferred and saved to the computer.
Menu screen
Transfer Move the [SET] button
send- up and down to select This proceeds to the Confirm Transfer
designated images, and then press screen.
images down the [SET] button.
[SET] images, and then press displayed.
[ ]
down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as
Button lights up
Confirm Transfer screen

Cancel OK Button turns off
Analyzing Send-designated Images screen

After analysis of the send-designated
images is complete, this proceeds to the
Transfer in Progress screen (with progress
bar).
Button turns off

Analysis Complete

Cancel
Button turns off

Finish Transfer or Cancel
If the number of images exceeds 9999, the value is fixed at 9999.
18
2-3-2-5 SELECT & TRANSFER

The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer.
Menu screen Function Operation Description

Select down the [SET] button.
images for Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and
transfer up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is
down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as
[ ] or [SET]
Button lights up
Select Image screen
This transfers the selected images.
After inputting the transfer, the user can
immediately continue to select other images
Transfer Press [SET] or and input transfer even while the transfer of
images button. an image is in progress.
If a file that cannot be played is selected for
transfer, a warning screen is displayed.
If an image is being transferred, this
[MENU] button while proceeds to the Transfer in Progress
image transfer is in Menu display Press [ MENU] button. screen.
progress This returns to the Menu screen if an image
[MENU] button is being transferred.
while image This moves the image selection forward/
transfer is not in
progress Change Press [CARD +/] backward.
image buttons. Changes can be made even if image
transfer is in progress.
Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar)
Button lights up Button flashing
(Image transfer in progress)

When the transfer is completed, this returns
to the Menu screen.
Transfer complete
Button flashing
Warning screen
The warning screen is displayed for about
one second, and then it returns to the
Select Image screen.
Button lights up
19
2-3-2-6 WALL PAPER

The user views the images one at a time and transfers and saves them to the computer.
The transferred image is displayed on the computer desktop
Menu screen
Set image as down the [SET] button.
computer Move the [SET] button The transfer confirmation is omitted, and
wallpaper up and down to select the Transfer in Progress screen is
[ ] or [SET] button down the Easy Direct The function executed last is recorded as
Button lights up
Select Image screen
This transfers the selected images.
After inputting the transfer, the user can
immediately continue to select other images
Transfer Press [SET] or and input transfer even while the transfer of
images button an image is in progress.
A warning screen is displayed if the transfer
is made with a motion video file selected.
If an image is being transferred, this
[MENU] button while proceeds to the Transfer in Progress
image transfer is in Menu display Press [MENU] button screen.
progress This returns to the Menu screen if an image
is being transferred.
[MENU] button This moves the image selection forward/
while image Change Press [CARD +/] backward.
transfer is not in image buttons Changes can be made even if image
progress transfer is in progress.
Button lights up Button flashing

(Image transfer in progress)
Image Transfer in Progress screen (no progress bar)

When the transfer is completed, this returns
to the Menu screen.
Button flashing
Warning screen

The warning screen is displayed for about
one second, and then it returns to the
Select Image screen.
Button lights up
20
3. Performance
1 Type VCR- integrated camera
2 Recording system Rotating two-head helical scan azimuth recording
Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
Complies with NTSC system (625 lines, 50 fields)
2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.
R-Y, B-Y = 6.75MHz
2-1-1 Quantized bits 8bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording.
16-bit : 48KHz 2 ch (Stereo 1)
12-bit : 32KHz 4 ch (Stereo 1 and 2)
2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot system
2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.83mm / sec (in SP mode)
Approx. 12.57mm / sec (in LP mode)
2-5 Head drum
2-5-1 Drum diameter 21.7mm
2-5-2 Rpms 9000 / 1.001 rotations / minute
2-5-3 Heads Video heads : 2
3 Recording / playback time 80 minutes maximum (in SP mode), using 80-minute tape
120 minutes maximum (in LP mode), using 80-minute tape
3-1 Continuous recording time / actual recording time / playback time using battery

When viewfinder is used When LCD monitor is used
Continuous Actual Continuous Actual Continuous
recording recording recording recording playback
NB-2L Approx. 95 min Approx.50 min Approx. 75 min Approx. 40 min Approx. 85 min
NB-2LH Approx.115 min Approx. 65 min Approx. 90 min Approx. 50 min Approx.105 min
BP-2L12 Approx.200 min Approx.110 min Approx.150 min Approx. 85 min Approx.175 min
BP-2L14 Approx.240 min Approx.135 min Approx.190 min Approx.105 min Approx.220 min
4 Compatible cassette tape Mini DVC specs

4-1 Tape type Vapor - deposited metal tape
4-2 Tape width 6.35mm
4-3 Tape thickness 7m or 5.3m
5 Camera
5-1 Image sensing device 1 / 4.5 - inch interlaced CCD
5-1-1 Total number of pixels Approx. 1.33 megapixels (1363H 975V)
5-1-2 Effective pixels
In tape recording Approx. 860,000 pixels (1072H 804V)
In card recording Approx. 1,230,000 pixels (1280H 960V)
High- resolution 16: 9 shooting Approx. 920,000 pixels (1280(H) 720(V) when image stabilizer is OFF)
(in tape mode) Approx. 790,000 pixels (1184(H) 666(V) when image stabilizer is ON)
5-1-3 Filter Color correction filter
5-1-4 Color separation system Differential readout
5-1-5 Signal configuration NTSC standard color TV signal
5-1-6 Scanning system 625 lines, 50 fields / 25 frames
5-1-7 Minimum subject illumination
In Auto mode Approx. 6.0 lx (1/25 sec. shutter speed)
In Low light mode Approx. 3.0 lx (1/12.5 sec. shutter speed)
In Night mode Approx. 1.5 lx (1/6 sec. shutter speed)
5-1-8 Subject illumination range Approx. 1.5 lx to approx. 100,000 lx
21
5-2 Photo lens

5-2-1 Nominal focal length
Tape recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 817.2 mm)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E
3.5 to 49 mm 14 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 45.4 to 635.6 mm)
Card recording MVX250i E 3.5 to 63 mm 18 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 682.2 mm)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E
3.5 to 49 mm 14 zoom (35 mm film equivalent : 37.9 to 530.6 mm)
5-2-2 Nominal diametric ratio
MVX250i E 1 : 1.8 (F3.4 on tele end)
1 : 1.8 (F3.3 on tele end)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E
1 : 1.8 (F3.1 on tele end)
5-2-3 Lens configuration 10 elements in 8 groups, using one two- sided aspherical lens
5-2-4 Focus adjustment Inner focus type, manually adjustable (adjusted by rotating multi- dial)
5-2-5 Minimum object distance 10 mm (AF linked ; wide end), 1 m for full zoom area (from lens tip)
5-2-6 Power zoom Multi- level adjustable power zoom. Slide lever operation. Zoom speed can be adjusted by mov-
ing slide lever.
Manual zoom not possible (No zoom ring)
5-2-6-1 Zoom speed
Optical zoom Approx. 4.3 seconds to approx. 50 seconds
Using electronic zoom Approx. 5.8 seconds to approx. 55 seconds
5-2-7 Focal length display None. Simple zoom display inside finder.
5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide end macro
5-2-9 Macro shooting distance 10 mm (from lens front)
5-2-10 Filter diameter 34 mm P0.5
5-2-11 Accessory lens, filter Can use WD-H34, TL-H34, FS-34U
5-2-12 Lens hood None
5-2-13 Lens cap Included ; Screw-on type
5-3 Digital zoom
5-3-1 During tape recording
MVX250i E To 72 (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 3,269 mm)), to 360 (approx. 1,260 mm (35 mm
equivalent : 16,344 mm))
MVX200i E, MVX200 E
To 56 (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent: 2,542 mm)), to 280 (approx. 980 mm (35 mm
equivalent : 12,712 mm))
5-3-2 During card recording
MVX250i E To 72 (approx. 252 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,728.8 mm))
MVX200i E, MVX200 E
To 56 (approx. 196 mm (35 mm equivalent : 2,122.4 mm))
5-4 Image stabilization function Supported
5-4-1 System Electronic image stabilizer
5-4-2 Image stabilization detection Angular velocity sensing (using piezoelectric vibration sensor)
5-5 Shooting modes Motion video shooting mode, photo shooting mode (card recording)
5-5-1 Tape mode Normal motion video is recorded (interlaced scanning) on miniDV cassettes.
In addition, when an SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard) is installed and [ ] Fine], or [
] Normal] is selected for [Photo record] on the menu, still images (640 480) are recorded
on the memory card while motion video is recorded on the tape. (Simultaneous recording)
5-5-2 Card mode Still images (progressive photo images: JPEG) or motion video (Motion- JPEG 15 (12.5) frames/
sec audio (monaural)) can be recorded on SD memory card (or MultiMediaCard).
Refer to the memory card system on page 27.
5-6 Exposure control
5-6-1 Program AE Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow
mode, Low Light mode, Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+, Super Night
mode are for MVX250i E only)
22
5-6-2 AE photometric system

Tape recording Center- bottom- weighted average :
Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode,
Night mode, Night+ mode, Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Super
Night mode are for MVX250i E only)
All area average photometry + 128-segment (16H 8V) evaluative photometry :
Spotlight mode, Surf & Snow mode
Card recording Evaluative photometry (128- segment):
Full Auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, Portrait mode, Low Light mode,
Night mode, Night+ mode and Super Night mode (Night+ mode and Su-
per Night mode are available in MVX250i E only.)
All area average photometry + 128- segment evaluative photometry :
Spotlight mode, Surf (Sand) &Snow mode
5-6-3 Exposure correction function
AE lock AE is locked by pressing the EXP lock button. After the AE is locked, the exposure level can be
corrected using the SET button (except in Full Auto mode).
Exposure correction amount 11 levels(11 to 0 to +11).
Indicated as number in the viewfinder (EXP lock 0).
5-6-4 Electronic shutter
5-6-4-1 In Auto mode <Tape mode>
Auto : 1/25 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter ON)
1/50 to 1/500 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)
Select : 1/50, 1/120, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000 or 1/2000 sec.
<Card mode>
Auto : 1/12.5 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter ON)
1/25 to 1/250 sec (with auto slow shutter OFF)
Select : 1/50, 1/120 or 1/250 sec.
5-6-4-2 In Low Light mode 1/12.5 (fixed speed)
5-6-4-3 In Night mode
Tape recording 1/6 sec to 1/500 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E)
Card recording 1/2 sec to 1/250 sec (same for Night+, Super Night modes of MVX250i E)
5-7 AF (Auto Focus)
5-7-1 System TTLvideo signal sensing
5-7-2 AF range finding area
During Tape mode Screen center
During Card mode One of 3 locations on screen selected (screen center only in full auto mode)
5-7-3 AF Range finding frame display
During Tape mode None
During Card mode Supported (During focus priority : User can select desired frame (green) from one of the 3- point
range finding frame display. Screen center only during Full Auto mode.)
5-7-4 AF operating range 10 mm to infinite (at wide end) ; 1 mm to infinite in full zoom area from lens front
5-7-5 AF operation illumination range Approx. 50 lx - 100,000 lx
5-7-6 AF mode switching Continuous AF / manual focus / infinite focus. AF ON/OFF switching is possible in all but Full
Auto mode (operation by pressing focus button).
Manual focus During manual focus (AF OFF), the MF indicator appears in the viewfinder.
Infinity focus The shooting distance can be forced to infinity by holding down the focus button in the auto
focus mode.
5-8 Viewfinder 0.33-inch Color LCD (approx. 113,000 pixels). ON when LCD monitor closed (panel facing in-
wards) and during mirror shooting
5-8-1 Rotation Possible (70 deg. upward to support low-angle shooting)
5-8-2 Detaching eyepiece Possible
5-8-3 Diopter movement range +1.0 to 5.0 diopter (when eye is at eyepiece)
5-8-4 Lens configuration Two elements in two groups
5-9 LCD monitor 2.5-inch Color LCD Approx. 123,000 pixels (560 (H) 220 (V)) TFT active matrix drive RGB
delta arrangement; ON when LCD monitor not closed (panel facing inwards)
5-9-1 Angle adjustment Possible ; Monitoring is possible for high-angle, low-angle, and mirror shooting
23
5-9-2 Information display Color display of operating mode, simple zoom position, remaining battery charge, remaining
tape, time code, warnings and other indications. The indicators are not displayed during mirror
shooting. 8 languages of Japanese, Chinese (simplified Chinese), English, German, French,
Italian, Spanish and Russian supported.
Relationship between LCD monitor and viewfinder
Camera mode, Card / Camera mode VCR mode and Card Playback
LCD panel position LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF
Panel closed (panel facing inwards) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel closed (panel facing outwards) ON OFF ON OFF
Panel open ON OFF ON OFF
Mirror shooting*2 ON*1 ON ON OFF
*1 : Mirror mode possible by menu selection.

*2 : During mirror mode, only or and the self-timer display
appear.
5-10 White balance adjustment TTL 128-segments, new white extraction system FAWB. Includes set / preset (outdoor: 5,600 k;
indoor: 3,200 k)
(selected from camera menu).
5-10-1 Adjustment range 2,800 k to 8,000 k
5-11 Digital feature functions The following modes are provided : Fader, Effects, Multi-screen
Fader : Linked to Start/Stop button. Can be used 1 time when Fade mode displayed.
(Mode indication goes out when Fader ends.)
Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until
mode is turned OFF.
Card mix : Mixes and displays included sample images, images recorded on cards and mo-
tion video.
5-11-1 Fader Audio synchronized fader
(Only in recording on tape) Auto Fade (Japanese model : Fade to white, Overseas model: Fade to black), Wipe, Corner Wipe,
Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
5-11-1-1 Fade time Approx. 4 sec
5-11-2 Effects Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color Mask, Mirror (Only Black and
White is available during card recording)
Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation
5-11-3 Multi-screen (tape recording only ; excludes Night mode)
5-11-3-1 Number of screens 4 (2 2), 9 (3 3), 16 (4 4)
5-11-3-2 Operation mode Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)
During Low Light mode, the settings are Fast (4 frames), Normal (8 frames), and Slow (12
frames)
5-12 Card Mix
5-12-1 Mix type Card Chroma Key, Card Lumi. Key, Camera Chroma Key, Card Animation
5-12-2 Mix level adjustment Possible. 32 levels
5-12-3 Animation type 3 types : Corner Animation, Straight Animation or Random Animation (Animation Titles are
already recorded in the supplied SD Memory Card SDC-8M.)
5-12-4 Availability in operation mode
Camera
Card (Still Image) Card (Motion Video) Tape (Still Image) Tape (Motion Video)
Fader
Effect Black and White only Black and White only
Multi-screen
Card Mix
24
5-13 Built-in microphone Stereo using electret condenser microphone

5-13-1 Wind screen function Supported ; AUTO or OFF can be selected (Selected from menu. However, built-in microphone
only.)
5-14 Auxiliary light (MVX250i E, MVX250i E only)
Equipped with white LED
5-14-1 Lighting mode Night+ mode : LED is forcibly lighted.
Super Night mode : LED lights depending on brightness of the subject.
5-15 Other additional functions
5-15-1 Time code Displays recording time (0:00:00 to 7:59:59) and records in sub-code area.
5-15-2 Data code The date and camera information during recording are automatically recorded and can be dis-
played during playback.
a. Time and date Automatic calendar range: January 1, 2004 through December 31, 2030 (the initial setting is
January 1, 2004)
One of the following three formats can be selected for the date / time display.
World clock capability (select the name of your destination city and the date and time are auto-
matically adjusted to the local date and time.) Supports daylight savings time.
During playback, time can be displayed in three different modes (date only, time and date, or
time only). (Time and date can be displayed for January 1, 1990 through December 31, 2089.)
b. Camera data Shutter speed and aperture value information are recorded (but not displayed during recording),
and can be displayed during playback.
5-15-3 Accessory shoe Supported. Advanced accessory shoe supported (MVX250i E only)
5-15-4 REC Search mechanism Supported. Tape can be played (forward or reverse) by pressing the REC Search button while
camera recording is paused. (When REC Search ends, camera recording is paused again.)
5-15-5 REC Review Supported. Accessed by operating the Recording Check button when camera recording is paused
(in Tape mode only).
5-15-6 Zero Set Memory Supported. This function allows you to rewind or fast-forward the tape to the position where the
WL-D83 Zero Set Memory key is pressed (the counter value is set to 0:00:00). (During record-
ing, only zero setting is allowed. This function can be used in Playback mode.) M display
appears at the far right of the counter.
5-15-7 Remote control reception ON/OFF Possible. This can be done in Camera mode and VCR mode (by selecting from menu).
5-15-8 Headphone volume adjustment Possible. Adjustable with SET button
5-15-9 16:9 shooting High- resolution 16: 9 (CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 790,000 pixels when image stabi-
lizer is ON or CCD extraction equivalent to approx. 920,000 pixels when image stabilizer is
OFF). If 16: 9 mode is selected, the screen switches to a letterbox display (with black bands
(masked) at the top and bottom)). In Tape mode only
5-15-10 AEB shooting Included. (First shot : No correction, Second shot : -0.5 level, Third shot : +0.5 level)
5-15-11 Skin detail mode When skin areas are detected, they are expressed softly, and the small blemishes, lines, etc.
become unnoticeable. ON or OFF setting possible.
5-15-12 Still image check time setting The time used for checking still images can be set after the photo button is pressed and its
operation is released. One of 6 settings; OFF (0 sec), 2, 4, 6, 8 or 10 seconds can be selected as
the setting mode.
6 Recorder
6-1 Recording functions Camera shooting and recording, DV input recording**, analog input recording
** : MVX250i E, MVX200i E only
6-1-1 Recording format Consumer electronics digital DVC (SD specs)
6-1-2 Tape speed Approx. 18.83 mm / second (in SP mode), approx. 12.57 mm / second (in LP mode)
6-1-3 DV input recording Complies with IEEE1394.
Records video / audio signals from a digital video camera connected through a DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording Records analog video / audio signals using an S-Video terminal or AV terminal.
(MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)
6-1-5 Priority of terminals during recording DV terminal > S-Video terminal > AV terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)
6-2 Audio Dubbing Recording Possible. (SD spec tapes only)
6-2-1 Insert-capable tape Only tapes with 12- bit/ SP recording (other than 4- channel simultaneous recording) can be used
in Audio Dubbing Recording.
25
6-2-2 Audio Dubbing signal input Audio signal from LINE (AV terminal) or microphone (external > internal). MVX200i E has no
external microphone terminal. MVX200 E has no external microphone terminal and line in
function.
6-2-3 Switching to Audio Dubbing Press audio dubbing button on remote control while playback is paused.
6-3 Playback functions Standard Playback and Superb Playback
6-3-1 Standard Playback
a. Video Video recorded in SP and LP modes
b. Audio 16-bit Supports the following sampling frequencies : 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz.
12-bit Sampling frequency : 32 kHz
Stereo 1, Stereo 2, or mixed playback of Stereo 1 and Stereo 2 (variable mix ratio)
6-3-2 Special Playback Plays video only
a. Still image playback Pure frame playback
b. Fast-forward playback Approx. 11.5 speed.
c. Rewind playback Approx. 11.5 speed.
d. Frame playback Forward/reverse frame feeding
e. Slow playback Forward/reverse 1/3 speed
f. 1 SP playback Forward/reverse 1 speed
g. 2 SP playback Forward/reverse 2 speed
6-4 Tape fast-forward / rewind time Approx. 2 minutes and 20 seconds (using 60-minute tape)
6-5 Search
6-5-1 Date search If there is more than one recording date, this function cue up to the position where the date
changes. Forward/reverse date search (use the / keys on the remote control after select-
ing Date search with the remote control Search Select key)
Search can be set for up to 10 images before or after the current position.
6-5-4 Index search None
6-5-5 End search When a tape is played back upon completion of the shooting, this function transports the tape to
the position where the shooting last ended, it cues to the end of the shooting on the tape, and then
places the tape in the stop mode. Furthermore, when an end search is being performed, the tape
is played back starting about 4 seconds before the end of the shooting, enabling the image imme-
diately before the end to be checked. However, this function does not work when the tape has
been removed after shooting.
6-6 Input signals
6-6-1 DV terminal SD format signals complying with IEEE1394 AV / C protocol (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)
6-6-2 AV terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)
a. Video signals
Types of signals PAL standard color video signals
Impedance 75
Signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signals
Types of signals Stereo audio signals
Impedance Min. 40 k
Signal level 10dBv
6-6-3 S Video terminal (MVX250i E, MVX200i E only)
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Impedance 75
Signal level 0.3Vp-p (color burst signal)
6-6-4 Microphone terminal Included. (MVX250i E only)
6-6-5 USB terminal Supports USB 2.0 FullSpeed class.
6-7 Output signals (MVX250i E only)
6-7-1 DV terminal SD format signals complying with IEEE1394-AV/C protocol
6-7-2 AV terminal
a. Video signals
Types of signals PAL standard color video signals
Impedance 75
Signal level 1 Vp-p (composite)
Horizontal resolution
Self-recording/playback Approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)
Camera EE OUT Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)
26
b. Audio signals
Types of signals Stereo audio signal
Impedance Max. 3 k
Signal level 10 dBv
Frequency characteristic 60 Hz to 16 kHz (Range between 1 kHz standard 3 dB)
Audio signal S/N
Built-in microphone input Min. 48 dB
External microphone input Min. 48 dB (However, the MVX200i E, MVX200 E model does not have an external micro-
phone input terminal.)
6-7-3 S-Video terminal
Signal configuration PAL Y/C separated video signal
Video signals 1 Vp-p (brightness + synchronization signal)
Color signal 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal)
Impedance 75
Signal level 0.3 Vp-p (Color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N Min. 45 dB
Horizontal resolution
Self recording / playback Conforms to camera EE OUT
Camera EE OUT Max. approx. 530 TV lines (screen center)
6-7-4 Headphone terminal 3.5 mm stereo mini jack
Output impedance 100
Signal level 25 dBv (with 16 load at maximum volume)
6-7-5 USB terminal Supports USB2.0 FullSpeed class
USB device class Independent class, PTP class, mass storage class, audio class, video class
Compatible computer systems Windows : IBM PC/AT compatible, NEC PC98-NX Series
Macintosh : Power Macintosh, PowerBook, iMac, iBook
PC operating system Windows : Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows ME, Windows 2000, Windows XP
Macintosh : Mac OS 9 or later
6-8 Memory card system
6-8-1 Types of memory cards used SD memory card, Multimedia card
6-8-2 Recordable image types
a. Still image JPEG recording
In Camera mode When [ ] Fine], or [ ] Normal] is selected for [PHOTO REC] on the [CAM SET UP]
menu, still images can be recorded on the memory card by operating the photo button while
motion video is being recorded on the tape. (Tape simultaneous recording function: VGA still
images)
In Card Recording mode Still image is recorded using the Photo button (image size and image quality are selectable).
Writing in Progress warning is displayed in the EVF/ LCD.
During playback mode Still image is recorded using the photo button during tape playback (pressed halfway down for
still image playback and pressed all the way down for recording). (VGA still images)
Also, DV input images (when no tape loaded or loaded tape is stopped) can be recorded by
pressing the photo button (pressing halfway captures still image of the DV input, pressing all the
way down records the image).
b. Motion video AVI (Video data: Motion JPEG / Audio data: WAVE (monoaural))
Records only camera images during Card Record mode and from tape during VCR mode (re-
cording from DV input,
AV input and S- Video input are disabled).
Image quality in recording onto card from tape / DV input
Source Source recording system Image recorded on card

Tape / DV input Progressive or frame motion video recording Progressive or frame image
Tape / DV input Normal motion video recording Simple pure frame image
Analog AV input Normal motion video recording Field image
27
6-8-3 File names/folder names Based on the DCF (Design rule for Camera File systems) and still image (Exif 2.2) file manage-
ment specifications / DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) file management specifications, the
following names are assigned to recorded cards after formatting in the Format menu.
a. Card volume label CANON DV
Types of files Compression system Folder name and file name
Still image (Exif 2.2) file JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/IMG_yyyy.JPG
Motion video file Motion JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.AVI
Motion video thumbnail file (*1) JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/MVIyyyy.THM
Photo stitch JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/STz_yyyy.JPG
Zoom browser JPEG //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG
DPOF file TEXT //MISC/AUTPRINT.MRK
Work file TEXT //DCIM/CANONMSC/xxx.tmp
xxx : Folder No., yyyy : File number, z : A to Z

(*1) Comes from motion video file of same File No.
DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxxCANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG
xxx : folder No., yyyy : file No.
b. File number Files are managed internally by folder No. and file No.
Photographed images are assigned file numbers from 0001 to 9900, and are stored in folders
(100 files to a folder). Each folder is assigned numbers 100 to 998.
Relationship between folder No. and file No.
Folder No. File No. Saved files
100 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100 Sample image included at time of shipping
101 0101 0102 0103 0199 0200
102 0201 0202 0203 0299 0300

198 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900 Photographed image recording area
200 0001 0002 0003 0099 0100

998 9801 9802 9803 9899 9900
Photographed images start from 101-0101, and are basically numbered to be greater than Direc-
tory No.- File No. of files saved on MultiMediaCards.
6-8-4 Recorded image size/image quality
a. Still image recording
In tape simultaneous recording 640 480 dots(VGA) / Switchable between Fine and Normal
In card / camera mode 1280 960 dots (XGA), 640 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and
Normal
During tape playback, line input, and card recording of DV input image
640 480 dots (VGA) / Switchable between Super Fine, Fine, and Normal
b. Motion video recording (Motion JPEG)
320 240, 160 120 dots 12.5 frames / sec
28
6-8-5 Number of recorded images / recording time
SDC-8M SDC-128M
a. Still image recording 1280 960dots (SXGA) 640 480dots (VGA) 1280 960dots (SXGA) 640 480dots (VGA)
Super Fine Approx. 6 images Approx. 34 images Approx. 144 images Approx. 709 images
(approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image) (approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image)
Fine Approx. 10 images Approx. 50 images Approx. 222 images Approx. 975 images
Normal Approx. 18 images Approx. 84 images Approx. 409 images Approx. 1560 images
b. Motion video recording 320 240dots 160 120 dots 320 240 dots 160 120 dots
Maximum recording time Approx. 20 sec Approx. 50 sec Approx. 8 minutes Approx. 17 minutes
Data size per second Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec
SDC-512M
a. Still image recording 1280 960dots (SXGA) 640 480dots (VGA)
Super Fine Approx. 577 images Approx. 2837 images
(approx. 850 KB per image) (approx. 175 KB per image)
Fine Approx. 891 images Approx. 3902 images
(approx. 550KB per image) (approx. 120KB per image)
Normal Approx. 1641 images Approx. 6243 images
(approx. 300 KB per image) (approx. 65 KB per image)
b. Motion video recording 320 240dots 160 120 dots
Maximum recording time Approx. 33 minutes Approx. 69 minutes
Data size per second Approx. 250 KB / sec Approx. 120 KB / sec
When a MultiMediaCard is used, the maximum recording time per shot is about 10 sec
(for 320 240) or about 30 sec (for 160 120).
* The included SDC-8M contains prerecorded title images, therefore the actual number of recorded images will be
less than above.
* The given number of recorded images is only for reference. The number will vary greatly depending on the focal
length, subject and other conditions when taking pictures.
* Windows XP : To connect the ELURA70 / 65 / 60A to a computer, the maximum continuous recording time of
movies on a memory card should be no longer than Approx. 12 minutes in 320 240 and 35 minutes in 160 120.
29
6-8-6 Continuous shooting Number of recorded images in continuous shooting
Fast frame feeding (5 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash)
Size Image quality VFL-1 Continuous images Remarks
Super Fine When not installed Up to 10 images
Fine (When flash is not Up to 10 images
Normal used) Up to 10 images
1280 960
Super Fine Up to 10 images Maximum flash
Fine When flash is used Up to 10 images emission is 1/4
Normal Up to 10 images of single shot flash
640 480
Normal frame feeding (3 frames / sec; 2 frames / sec when using flash)
Size Image quality VFL-1 Continuous images Remarks
1280 960
640 480
30
6-8-7 Card format Formats using format command in the main unit menu. Operation is not guaranteed with PC
formats as problems can occur with some OS.
6-8-8 Usable memory card
SD memory card San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB
Matsushita Electric : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB
Toshiba : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB
MultiMediaCard San Disk : 8 MB, 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB
Hitachi : 16 MB, 32 MB, 64 MB
(However, this does not mean that the operation of all these memory cards is guaranteed.)
6-9 Digital feature playback function The following modes are provided : Fader, Effect, Multi-screen.
Can be executed once when Fader mode is displayed in conjunction with pressing the button
(the mode display disappears when Fader ends).
Effects : Effect continues until mode is turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Loads and displays multiple screens at set interval or manually. Displayed until
mode is turned OFF.
6-9-1 Fader Audio synchronized Fader
Same as in recording mode. Auto Fade (Japanese model: Fade to white, Overseas model : Fade to
black), Wipe, Corner Wipe, Jump, Flip, Puzzle, Zigzag, Beam, Tide
Fade time Approx. 4 sec
6-9-2 Effects Same as in recording mode. Art, Black and White, Sepia, Mosaic, Ball, Cube, Wave, Color
Mask, Mirror (only in Tape mode)
Effect function turned ON / OFF from D. Effect button. Toggle operation
6-9-3 Multi-screen
a. Number of screens 4 (2 2), 9 (3 3), 16 (4 4)
b. Screen capture speed Manual, Fast (4 frames), Normal (6 frames), Slow (8 frames)
6-9-4 Card mix Not available
6-9-5 Availability in operation modes
Playback (VCR / Tape) Card playback
Fader
Effects
Multi-screen
Card Mix
6-10 Direct print Still images recorded on memory cards can be easily printed by connecting to (sold separately)
card photo printers CP-200/300, Camera Direct Printer compatible BJ printers PIXUS 470PD/
JP450i with supplied IFC-300PCU interface cable. DPOF print setup support (max. 200images)
6-10-1 Printable images Only the still images which have been recorded on the SD memory cards or MultiMediaCards.
6-10-2 Print format Single image/8-image print (layout of 8 pictures of same image : only when the card size paper
tray has been installed in the CP200/300). Printing not available from index screen.
6-10-3 Trimming Possible
6-10-4 Date printing Possible (when connected to PictBridge compatible printer except for the CP-200/CP-300.)
6-10-5 Number of print copies Easy Print : 1 to 99 sheets
DPOF printing : Max. 200 images, 1 to 99 each
31
6-10-6 Print systems
Print Canon Other

manufacturer manufacturer
CP BJ Photo
Printer CP specifications + BJ Photo specifications + PictBridge
specifications specifications PictBridge specifications only PictBridge specifications only
specifications specifications
BJ-895PD/ PIXUS 990i,
Suitable printer CP-10/100 CP-200/300 535PD/F890PD,
900PD
PIXUS 50i
Printer
specifications
when
connected to CP camera direct PictBridge PictBridge PictBridge
MVX250i E, BJ camera direc
MVX200i E, specifications specifications specifications specifications specifications
MVX200 E
(Controlled at
printer side)
CP camera direct PictBridge BJ camera direct PictBridge PictBridge

control control control control control
When the
printer is
connected
DPOF printing
screen
Paper setting
Paper size
Paper type
Borders/
no borders
Printing functions
8-of-1 screen
(When card size
layout
paper is used)
Sectional
printing (When card size
paper is used)
Image
optimizing
Date printing
Trimming (Area selection)
): When the printer is supported
32
6-11 Other
6-11-1 Consecutive shooting mechanism Can be used starting in Recording Pause or Stop mode, or starting with the power off. This does
not apply to cases where the cassette has been removed.
6-11-2 Automatic stop function When forward still image playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes, or reverse still image
playback is continued for approx. 5 minutes. When a condensation warning is displayed. When
the tape end or beginning is reached.
6-11-3 Power automatic stop function When Recording Pause continues for approx. 5 min. When the battery voltage falls below a
specified value.
6-11-4 Time code Automatically written during recording. Time code values range from 0:00:00:00 to 7:59:59:24
(hours:minutes:seconds:frames).
6-11-5 World clock display Set reference city (city of time clock setting) and select name of city when shooting. Date and
time are automatically adjusted to local date and time, and recorded in data code.
6-11-6 Speaker Built-in, volume control provided
6-11-7 File transfer
a. USB file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can
be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) on the PC can be downloaded to memory cards
in the camcorder by connecting the included IFC-300PCU interface cable between a USB port
on the PC and the USB port of the camcorder.
b. DV file transfer Still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) recorded on memory cards can
be uploaded to a PC and still images (JPEG files) and motion video (Motion JPEG files) on the
PC can be downloaded to memory cards in the camcorder by connecting a CV-150F (or CV-
250F) DV cable between an IEEE1394 port on the PC and the DV terminal of the camcorder.
6-11-8 Analog / Digital conversion Converts analog AV signals input to the AV terminal into digital DV signals in real-time and
(PAL models excluded) outputs the digital DV signals from the DV terminal.
When an 8 mm video player or VHS video player is connected with the camcorder using an AV
cable, and the camcorder is connected to a PC using a DV cable, playback images can be trans-
ferred from the 8 mm tape or VHS tape to the PC. (Under the VCR settings on the VCR menu
screen, set AV input DV output to ON.)
6-11-9 Playback zoom If the zoom lever is flipped to the tele side during image playback from the tape or card (MVX250i
E only, except for motion video), the image being played back can be enlarged to 5 times its size.
When the zoom lever is flipped to the wide side, the enlarged image is returned to its original
size.
Position of the enlarged section during enlarged screen view can be changed by SET button. (On
the LCD monitor, a frame is displayed to show the zoom-in area, and the direction in which the
area can be moved by the SET button is indicated by / .) Toggling between the up/down
and left/right movement direction settings is performed by pressing the SET button. (Left /
right is the default setting when the mode is transferred to zoom-in.)
6-11-10 Battery charging function When the CA-570 Canon compact power adapter is connected, the battery pack installed in the
battery pack compartment can be charged. (During charging, the charge lamp flashes (one flash
with a charge level of 0% to 50%, and two flashes with a charge level of more than 50%) or it
lights (when the charging is complete with a charge level of 97% or more)).
Charging time NB-2L : Approx. 110 min., NB-2LH : Approx. 115 min.,
(when power switch is at OFF) BP-2L12 : Approx. 180 min., BP-2L14 : Approx. 210 min.
6-11-11 Simultaneous still image If the photo button is pressed while motion video is recorded to tape, still images
recording (image size : 640 480, image quality : Selectable from Fine or Normal) can be recorded on the
memory card.
6-11-12 Accessory shoe Support for advanced accessory shoe (MVX250i E model), No support for advanced accessory
shoe (MVX200i E, MVX200 E model)
6-11-13 Recording lamp None
33
6-12 Terminal
6-12-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin (IEEE1394 compatible) ; input and output
(MVX200i E, MVX200 E model has output only.)
6-12-2 S-Video terminal 4-pin mini-DIN ; input and output
6-12-3 AV (Audio / Video) terminal 3.5 mm 4-pole pin jack (yellow) ; input / output
(output only on MVX200i E, MVX200 E model) ; Also serves as headphone terminal
6-12-4 External microphone input Included (However, except for MVX200i E, MVX200 E model)
terminal
6-12-5 Headphone terminal 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (also serves as AV terminal)
6-12-6 Memory card connection Special multi-pin
terminal
6-12-7 Battery terminal Special 3-pin
6-12-8 DC IN terminal 3.4 mm jack (for connecting CA-570)
6-12-9 USB terminal 5-pin (mini-B Receptacle)
7 Power supply
7-1 Input power supply 7.4V DC (battery pack), 8.4V DC (DC IN).
7-2 Power consumption During recording : Approx. 2.6 W (using EVF) ; Approx. 3.3 W (using LCD monitor)
During playback : Approx. 2.8 W (using LCD monitor)
8 Dimensions (W H D) Approx. 74 78 130 mm (2.9 3.1 5.1 in) (Protrusions excluded)
Approx. 79 78 130 mm (3.1 3.1 5.1 in) (Maximum width with protrusious)
9 Weight
9-1 Body MVX250i E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 500 g (1.1 lb)
9-2 Total equipped weight MVX250i E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb)
MVX200i E, MVX200 E : Approx. 560 g (1.2 lb)
(Including NB-2LH, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M)
MVX250i E : Approx. 600 g (1.3 lb)
(Including BP-2L14, DVM-E30, lens cap, lithium coin battery, and SDC-8M)
10 Temperature and humidity requirements
10-1 Temperature and humidity requirements for performance
0 to 40C, 85% (relative humidity)
10-2 Temperature and humidity requirements for operation
5 to 40C, 65% (relative humidity)
34
4. System Diagram (Common to all Models)
WS-20 Wrist Strap
SS-900 Shoulder Strap

CBC-NB2
Car Battery Charger
WD-H34 MiniDV
Wide-converter Video Cassette NB-2L, NB-2LH,
CB-2LTE BP-2L12, BP-2L14
WL-D83 Wireless Battery Charger Battery Pack
Controller
TL-H34
Tele-converter CA-570 Compact
Power Adapter
FS-34U NB-2L, NB-2LH,

Filter Set BP-2L12, BP-2L14
Battery Pack
S-150 S-video Cable
PC-A10 SCART TV
VFL-1 Video Flash Light Adapter
STV-250N
Stereo Video Cable
VCR
VL-3 Video Light CV-150F/CV-250F

DV Cable Digital Device
SDC-128M PC Card Adapter

DM-50 Directional SD Memory Card
Stereo Microphone USB Reader/Writer
Stereo Microphone
(commercially available) MultiMediaCard
Computer
IFC-300PCU
USB Cable
BP-900 Series
Battery Pack VL-10Li
Battery
Video Light
Canon printers with direct print function /

PictBridge-compliant printers
SC-2000 Soft
Carrying Case
Fig. 2
35
5. Overview of viewfinder / LCD panel displays
5-1 Camera mode
MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL REMARKS

Camera mode
Zoom / Exposure correction

bar display
(displayed for approx.
four seconds after zoom operation)
Zoom bar display
Optical Zoom W T
72 digital zoom W T MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56

360 digital zoom W T MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 280
Zooming is stopped W T
Zooming to telephoto end W T
Zooming to wide end W T
Exposure correction bar display

Minimum correction : -11 level
Correction default setting
Maximum correction : +11 level

Displayed by correctable range
During Full Auto No display
Image stabilizer display

The image stabilizer is ON
The image stabilizer is OFF No display
Recording mode display

SP recording
LP recording
36

Operating mode display
Recording
Recording Pause
Playback is stopped
Cassette is ejected
+ REC Search
- REC Search
Program AE mode display

Full Auto mode is selected Always displayed
Auto mode is selected A Displayed for approx.
4 seconds and then turns OFF.
Sports mode is selected
Portrait mode is selected
Spotlight mode is selected
Surf & Snow mode is selected After displayed for approx. 4 seconds,
Low Light mode is selected only characters are displayed.
Night mode is selected
Night+ mode is selected* MVX250i E only
Super Night mode is selected* MVX250i E only
Program AE mode menu
Skin detail mode display

Skin detail mode is selected
Skin detail mode is not selected No display
Tape counter display

Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory M
Not entered M
37

EXP lock display
Minimum exposure compensation value
Default setting
Maximum exposure value

During Full Auto No display
Tape information display

Remaining tape display
Tape end
Not entered
Tape warning display flashes
Other No display
Shutter speed display When Auto mode is selected

1/50 sec is selected
Timer display
During recording
Self-timer is activated
Mirror shooting Displays large in screen center.

Displayed with right and left sides
reversed when Mirror is set to ON.
38

Remaining battery level display Approx. 100% remaining
Approx. 75% remaining
Approx. 0% remaining,
warning display (flashes red)
Power adapter is attached No display
Focus mode display

AF is set to OFF
AF is set to ON No display
Set to infinity
Lithium coin battery warning flashes red
Condensation warning display flashes red
White balance display

Set
Indoor preset
Outdoor preset
Auto No display
Remote control code display

Code setting 1 is selected
Code setting 2 is selected
Remote controller receive OFF is selected
Card Mix display
Headphone volume display

When volume is adjusted
When volume is at off
39

Digital feature display
Auto Fade is selected
Wipe is selected
Corner Wipe is selected
Jump is selected
Flip is selected
Puzzle is selected
Zigzag is selected
Beam is selected
Tide is selected
Art is selected
Black and White is selected
Sepia is selected
Mosaic is selected
Ball is selected
Cube is selected
Wave is selected
Color Mask is selected
Mirror is selected
Multi-screen is selected
Digital feature are turned OFF No display
Digital feature menu
40
Digital feature selection

Press the DIGITAL EFFECT button.
The line where the cursor is located in the menu is displayed with a turquoise background.
The previously selected items and the corresponding settings are shown in yellow.
OFF
In Fader Selection
In Effect Selection
In Multi Screen Selection In Multi Screen Speed Selection
In Multi Screen Count Selection
41

Wind screen display
Auto Wind Screen is turned ON No display
Auto Wind Screen is turned OFF
Area Summer Time display

Area Summer Time display
Time and date is not set
* The desired style can be selected from among the styles shown above.
Flash display (activated when VFL-1 is attached)

When Auto Flash is selected
When Red-eye Reduction
Auto Flash is selected
When Flash On is selected
When Flash Off is selected
Audio mode display

12-bit
16-bit
16:9 mode display

When 16:9 shooting is selected
when it is not selected No display
Photo half-pressed lock display

AF / AE operation in progress flashes
After AF / AE lock green light
Advanced shoe information

When a valid connection is made to C
DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3

When accessory is not connected No display
Card information display

When OFF is selected in still image No display
recording
When Fine is selected
When Normal is selected
42
5-2 VCR mode

VCR mode
Audio 12-bit output display

When 12-bit Stereo 1 is selected
When 12-bit Stereo 2 is selected
When 12-bit mixed 1:1 is selected
When 12-bit mixed variable is selected
16-bit No display
Mix balance display

Mix ratio 1:0
Mix ratio 1:1
Mix ratio 0:1
Recording mode display

SD mode SP recording
LP recording

During recording Red display
During recording pause
Cassette is ejected
Playback is stopped
Playback
Fast forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast playback
2 speed playback
1 speed playback
Slow playback
Frame playback
Still image playback
Still image reverse playback
43

Frame reverse playback
Slow reverse playback
1 SP reverse playback
2 SP reverse playback
Rewind playback
Forward date search
Reverse date search
FF return
REW return
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing recording
Tape counter
Time code display
Not entered
Zero Set Memory Same as during Camera mode
Remaining tape display Same as during Camera mode
Audio dubbing /
search operation display
Audio dubbing is selected
Data search operation
When end search is selected
Other than search No display
Remaining battery level display Same as during camera mode
Lithium coin battery Warning display Same as during camera mode
Condensation warning display Same as during camera mode
Remote control code display Same as during camera mode
Digital feature display Same as during camera mode
44

Speaker / Headphone volume
adjustment display
When Speaker is selected
When volume is at OFF

When Headphone is selected Same as during camera mode
Wind screen display Same as during camera mode
Data code display

Data code settings
Date and time &
Time and date Camera data
camera data
Date
Date and time selection
setting
Time
setting
Date &
time
settings
Camera data
Aperture value display This products aperture value is
from F1.8
Aperture fully close There is no Aperture Fully

Close function in this product
Not entered
Shutter speed display This products shutter speed is

1/2 sec to 1/2000 sec
Not entered
45

Time display
Time setting is selected
Not entered
Time and time setting are selected
Not entered
Data display
Not entered
Audio mode display

Audio mode display Same as during camera mode
Audio input display
Audio input terminal is selected
Microphone terminal is selected
16:9 mode display

16:9 tape playback
Normal tape play back No display
Advanced shoe information

When a valid connection is made to C
DM-50, VFL-1, or VL-3

When accessory is not connected No display
DV input display
AV DV signal conversion is selected
Other No display
Playback zoom display
46
5-3 Card / Camera mode

Card/Camera mode
Zoom/Exposure correction display

Zoom/Exposure correction display Same as Camera mode
(except that Digital zoom is 72/64/56 only)
Over exposure warning (flashes) Caution is indicated when F11 or higher
Continuous shot / AEB mode display

When Continuous Shooting mode
is selected
When fast continuous shot mode
is selected
When AEB mode is selected
When Single Shot mode is selected No display
Card recording quality display
Program AE mode display Same as during Camera mode
Skin detail mode display Same as during Camera mode
Stitch Assist quantity display Clockwise

Counter-clockwise
Image stabilizer warning display Displayed when the shutter speed is

1/60 second or less
Card access display Writing and reading
47

Card remaining display
No card (flashes red)
9999 or more images can be recorded
99 images can be recorded
5 images can be recorded

Yellow display
1 image scan be recorded
EXP lock display Same as during Camera/Tape mode
Self-timer display Same as during Camera mode
Still image size display

1280 768 is selected
640 480 is selected
Motion video size display

320 240 is selected
160 120 is selected
Shutter speed display
Focus mode display Same as during Camera mode
Remaining battery level display Same as during Camera mode
White balance display Same as during Camera mode
AF frame display
AF priority Center only during green mode
After three seconds, the green display
section only appears white.
48

Lithium coin battery Same as during Camera mode
low power warning display
Condensation warning display Same as during Camera mode
Remote control code display Same as during Camera mode
Digital feature display Black and White only
Wind screen display Same as during Camera mode
Area Summer Time display Same as during Camera mode
Time and date display Same as during Camera mode

(date and time only)
Flash display Same as during Camera mode
Photo half-pressed lock display Same as during Camera mode
Advanced shoe information Same as during Camera mode
Motion video available

recording time display
hour : minutes
Headphone volume adjustment display Same as during Camera mode
Photo half-pressed lock display Same as during Camera mode
Stitch Assist operation guide
49
5-4 Card Playback mode

5-4-1 Still image Playback

Card Playback mode (Still images)
Title display
Slide show
Card playback
Send designation mark display
Print mark display
Protect mark display
DCF file name display

Directory number-File number
PC USB connection display

When not connected No display
Card access display
Image number display

No card Red flashing display
Checking number of images
recorded on card
0 recorded images
9th of 99 recorded images
50

Data code display Same as during VCR mode
Playback zoom operation guide display Same as during VCR playback mode
Slideshow operation guide display
5-4-2 Motion video (Motion JPEG) Playback
Motion video
(Motion JPEG)
Card information display

No card Red flashing display
Checking number of images recorded
on card
0 recorded images
Motion video size display
Speaker/headphone volume adjustment Same as during VCR mode

Playback
Playback pause
Data code display Same as during VCR mode

Total playback time display
Lap time display
51
5-4-3 Direct printing

Card Playback mode
(Direct printing)
Printer connected display

CP Direct compatible printer SET
PictBridge compatible printer SET
Bubble Jet Direct compatible printer SET
52
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCTUCT
5-5 Menu Display

The menu display has Camera mode, VCR mode, Card/Camera mode, and Card Playback mode.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB MENU ITEM SETTINGS DEFAULT BACKUP
CARD MIX Switches to Card mix selection screen
CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

1/50
1/120
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
A. SL SHUTTER ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D. ZOOM *1 OFF Lithium battery
72 / 64 / 56 72 / 64 / 56
360 / 320 / 280
IMAGE STAB ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
16 : 9 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
FLASH *2 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
RED-EYE
FLASH ON
FLASH OFF
AF AST LAMP *2 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
NIGHT MODE *3 NIGHT Lithium battery
NIGHT+
S.NIGHT
SKIN DETAIL SOFT NORMAL Reset by turning power off

NORMAL
PHOTO REC *2 OFF
FINE Lithium battery
NORMAL
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
AV/PHONES AV AV Lithium battery
PHONES
RETURN
53
AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

OFF
AUDIO MODE 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
VOLUME Lithium battery
RETURN
DISPLAY SET UP/ BRIGHTNESS Lithium battery
LCD MIRROR ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ESPAOL
FRANAIS
ITALIANO
PyCCK

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004
AM 12:00 12:00 AM
JAN. 1, 2004
12:00 AM
1. JAN. 2004
12:00 AM
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
54
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium battery

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS

CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN.
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO

FERNAN.
FERNAN.
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL 1. JAN. 2004 1. JAN. 2004 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
MY CAMERA S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
OPER. SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
SELF-T SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
RETURN
CLOSE
*1: Model MVX250i E : 72 / 360, model MVX200i E, MVX200 E : 56 / 280

*2: Models MVX250i E, when VFL-1 is attached
*3: Models MVX250i E only
55
VCR Mode
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery

LP
AV/PHONES AV AV Lithium battery
PHONES
AV DV OUT *1 ON OFF Reset by turning
OFF power off
RETURN
AUDIO SET UP OUTPUT CH L/R L/R Reset by turning
L/L power off
R/R
AUDIO DUB. *1 AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium battery
MIC. IN
WIND SCREEN AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
AUDIO MODE 16bit 12bit Lithium battery
12bit
12bit AUDIO STEREO1 STEREO1 Reset by turning
STEREO2 power off
MIX/FIXED
MIX/VARI.
MIX BALANCE Lithium battery
RETURN
CARD SET UP *2 IMG QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery
FINE
NORMAL
MOVIE SIZE 320 240 320 240 Lithium battery
160 120
FILE NOS. RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
RETURN

OFF
DISPLAYS ON ON Lithium battery
OFF <PLAYBK>
6 SEC. DATE ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
DATA CODE DATE/TIME DATE/TIME Lithium battery
CAMERA DATA
CAM. & D/T
D/TIME SEL. DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
56
DISPLAY SET UP/ LANGUAGE DEUTSCH ENGLISH

ENGLISH
ESPAOL
FRANAIS
ITALIANO
PyCCK

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004
AM 12:00 12:00 AM
JAN. 1, 2004
12:00 AM
1. JAN. 2004
12:00 AM
RETURN
OFF
OFF
T. ZONE/DST LONDON PARIS Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS

CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN.
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO

FERNAN.
FERNAN.
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL JAN. 1, 2004 1. JAN. 2004 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
57
MY CAMERA SHTR SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery

DEFAULT
MY SOUND
S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
RETURN
CLOSE
*1 : Excluding model MVX200 E
58
Card / Camera Mode
CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery

1/50
1/120
1/250
A. SL SHUTTER ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D. ZOOM OFF OFF Lithium battery
72 / 64 / 56
WHIT BAL. AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
FLASH *1 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
RED-EYE
FLASH ON
FLASH OFF
AF AST LAMP *1 AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
FOCUS PRI. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
ND AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
OFF
NIGHT MODE *2 NIGHT NIGHT+ Lithium battery
NIGHT+
S.NIGHT
SKIN DETAIL SOFT NORMAL Reset by turning power off

NORMAL
REVIEW OFF 2sec Lithium battery
2sec
4sec
6sec
8sec
10sec
RETURN
CARD SET UP IMG QUALITY SUPER FINE FINE Lithium battery
FINE
NORMAL
IMG SIZE 1280 960 1280 960 Lithium battery
640 480
MOVIE SIZE 320 240 320 240 Lithium battery
160 120
FILE NOS. RESET CONTINUOS Lithium battery
CONTINUOS
RETURN
VCR SET UP AV/PHONES AV AV Reset by turning power off
PHONES
RETURN
AUDIO SET UP WIND SCREEN ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
VOLUME Lithium battery
RETURN
59
LCD MIRROR ON ON Lithium battery

OFF
OFF
D/T DISPLAY ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
ENGLISH
ESPAOL
FRANAIS
ITALIANO
PyCCK

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004
AM 12:00 12:00 AM
JAN. 1, 2004
12:00 AM
1. JAN. 2004
12:00 AM
DEMO MODE ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
OFF
OFF
60

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS

CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN.
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO

FERNAN.
FERNAN.
AZORES
AZORES
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
MY CAMERA S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
RETURN
CLOSE
*1 : Displayed only when VFL-1 is attached, Models MVX250i E only

*2 : Models MVX250i E only
61
Card Playback Mode (Card/VCR mode)
CARD OPERATIONS PRINT ORDERS Switches to erase all print designations screen
(for single screen) ALL ERASE
TRANSFER ORDERS Switches to erase send designations screen
ALL ERASE
IMAGE ERASE CANCEL None
SINGLE
ALL
FORMAT CANCEL None
EXECUTE
RETURN
CARD OPERATIONS PROTECT Switches to image protect screen
(for index screen)
PRINT ORDER Switches to print designations screen
TRANSFER Switches to send designations screen

ORDER
RETURN
VCR SET UP AV/PHONES AV AV Reset by turning power off
PHONES
RETURN

OFF
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery
OFF <PLAYBK>
D/TIME SEL. DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
ENGLISH
ESPAOL
FRANAIS
ITALIANO
PyCCK

DATE FORMAT 2004. 1. 1 1. JAN. 2004
AM 12:00 12:00 AM
JAN. 1, 2004
12:00 AM
1. JAN. 2004
12:00 AM
RETURN
OFF
OFF
62

LONDON
PARIS
PARIS

CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN.
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR.
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO

FERNAN.
FERNAN.
AZORES
AZORES
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
31. DEC. 2030

11:59 PM
RETURN
MY CAMERA CREATE START-UP IMAGE Switches to startup image creation screen
SEL. S-UP IMG. OFF CANON LOGO Lithium battery

CANON LOGO
MY PICTURE
S-UP SOUND OFF DEFAULT Lithium battery
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
DEFAULT
MY SOUND
RETURN
CLOSE
63
5-6 Card-related screen displays

Slideshow screen
Image setup screen
Index screen
Image protect screen
64

Print designations screen
Send designations screen
Image erase screen

Image erase selection screen
Erasing one image
Warning: Erasing in progress
65

Image erase screen
Erasing all images
Format screen
Format execution confirmation screen
Format execution screen
66

Card mix selection screen
Mix type setting screen
Animation type setting screen
Mix level setting screen
67

Stitch assist screen
My camera settings
My camera settings screen
Startup image creation screen
Recording position selection
68

My camera settings
Record execution confirmation
Message being created
Startup image selection screen
Startup sound selection screen
Select Shutter Sound screen
69

My camera settings
Operation sound selection screen
Self-timer sound selection screen
PC connection screen
During USB connection
During IEEE1394 connection
70
5-7 Direct print setting screen
MENU INDICATION PAL MODEL

Direct print setting screen
Direct print setting initial screen
Print selection screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer

BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
CARD#1 DEFAULT
BORDERED DEFAULT
STYLE DEFAULT
TRIMMING OFF PAPER

OFF TRIMMING
1 COPIES
PRINT
PRINT CANCEL 1 COPIES CANCEL
Cancel print screen
CARD#1 DEFAULT
BORDERED DEFAULT
DEFAULT
NOW PRINTING (1/3) NOW PRINTING (1/3)
STOP
STOP
Cancel selection screen
CARD#1 DEFAULT
BORDERED DEFAULT
STYLE DEFAULT
TRIMMING OFF PAPER

OFF TRIMMING
1 COPIES
PRINT
71

Quantity setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer
CARD#1 DEFAULT
BORDERED DEFAULT
STYLE DEFAULT
TRIMMING OFF PAPER

OFF TRIMMING
3 COPIES
PRINT
Trimming setting screen
CARD#1 DEFAULT
BORDERED DEFAULT
STYLE DEFAULT
TRIMMING OFF PAPER

OFF TRIMMING
1 COPIES
PRINT
72

Paper setting, PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer
paper size setting screen BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
STYLE
PAPERSIZE
CARD#1
CARD#2
PAPER
CARD#3
8.5"x11"
A4
CARD#1 DEFAULT
MENU MENU CANCEL SET NEXT
STYLE
PAPERSIZE
CARD#1
CARD#2
PAPER
CARD#3
CARD#1 8.5"x11"
A4
DEFAULT
STYLE
PAPERSIZE
CARD#1
CARD#2
PAPER
CARD#3
CARD#2 8.5"x11"
A4
DEFAULT
* Camera Direct compatible BJ print- * Only paper sizes supported by the

ers only. printer can be selected from among
Default, L, 2L, Postcard, Card, 4
6, Letter, Letter, A4, Roll (L), Roll
(2L), Roll (A4), and 5 7.
73

Paper type setting screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer
PAPERTYPE
PHOTO
FAST PHOTO
DEFAULT
MENU PREVIOUS SET NEXT
PAPERTYPE
PHOTO
FAST PHOTO
DEFAULT
No function
PAPERTYPE
PHOTO
FAST PHOTO
DEFAULT
* Only paper types supported by the se-

lected paper size can be selected from
among Default, Photo Paper and Fast
Photo Paper.
74

Borders/no borders setting, PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer
8-of-1 screen layout selection screen BJ Direct (Pixus 50i) compatible printers (CP-200/300, Pixus 990i)
STYLE
LAYOUT
BORDERLESS
BORDERED
BORDERS
DEFAULT
BORDERED
MENU MENU PREVIOUS SET NEXT
STYLE
LAYOUT
BORDERLESS
BORDERS BORDERED
DEFAULT
BORDERED
STYLE
LAYOUT
BORDERLESS
BORDERS BORDERED
DEFAULT
BORDERLESS
Split screen (CP-10/100) and

8-of-1 screen layout setting
STYLE
LAYOUT
(CP-200/CP-300)
BORDERLESS
IMAGE BORDERED
DEFAULT
MULTIPLE
75
5-8 Print designations

Print designations screen PC Direct (CP-10/100) and PictBridge compatible printer
CARD #1 PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES

99
BORDER-
LESS 98 OFF
STYLE
DEFAULT OFF
PRINT ALL MARKED IMAGES
DEFAULT PAPER
OK CANCEL DEFAULT PRINT
RESUME RESUME CANCEL
Cancel print screen
NOW PRINTING(1/98)
99 CARD #1
BORDER-
LESS 98 OFF
DEFAULT OFF
NOW PRINTING(1/99) DEFAULT
BORDERLESS
STOP
STOP
Restart print screen
98 IMAGES REMAINING
98 CARD
STOP PRINTING?
BORDER-
LESS 98 OFF
DEFAULT OFF
98 IMAGES REMAINING DEFAULT
STOP PRINTING?
BORDERLESS
OK CANCEL OK CANCEL
Style setting screen
CARD #1
99
BORDER-
LESS
STYLE
No function
CHANGE PRINT STYLE
OK CANCEL
RESUME
76
5-9 Warning displays
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED

When copy-protected tape is played.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED

When copy protection information is detected during DV input or LINE input, or when the signal output from the television or
VCR is garbled during analog input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME

When the power is turned on without setting the area and/or time and date.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE

When a cassette is inserted while there is a mechanical error or condensation in the unit.
CHECK THE DV INPUT

When REC is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC, without a connection to DV input, or in a condition where the
connected DV input cannot be recognized.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK

When the battery power is low.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED

When condensation is detected (if a cassette is inserted, a REMOVE THE CASSETTE message appears).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

When REC is pressed in a mode that allows transition to REC in VCR mode, if the cassette is set for erasure prevention. In
Camera mode, when the power is turned ON, when the Start/Stop button is pressed, and when a cassette is inserted.
TAPE END
When the tape end is detected, or when a key (FF, PLAY, etc.) which drives the tape forward is pressed in a mode that allows
transition to forward driving during the detection process.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]

When the Audio Dubbing or AV Insert button is pressed at a tape position recorded in LP, or when LP mode is detected during
Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]

When the Audio Dubbing button is pressed at a tape position with 16-bit or 4-channel simultaneous recording, or when 16-bit
mode or 4-channel simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]

When a blank tape area is detected during Audio Dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE

77
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE

When a print head is clogged.
CARD ERROR
When a card error occurs and data cannot be recorded on the card.
CARD FULL
When the card is full.
NAMING ERROR
When the maximum number of file numbers and directory numbers are created.
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE
When an attempt is made to playback an image in an unplayable format, an incompatible JPEG image, or an image with corrupt
data.
PRINT ORDER ERROR

When there are too many print marks (100 or more), or when a mark file cannot be edited.
NO CARD
When there is no card in the camcorder socket.
NO IMAGES
When there are no images to be played in the card.
THE CARD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION

When an attempt is made to record on an SD card set for erasure prevention, in a mode that allows card recording (VCR mode,
Card Recording mode).
NOW CREATING START-UP IMAGE

The startup screen is being written to flash memory.
THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE USED AS START-UP IMAGE
IN CARD POSITION
When Start/Stop button is pressed in the Camera mode.
THIS IMAGE CANNOT BE RECORDED

(Models MVX250i E)
DIFFERENT CARD FORMAT

When the card format is not supported by the camcorder.
78
PAPER ERROR
When there is a problem with the paper.
NO PAPER
When the paper has not been inserted into the printer properly or there is no paper in the printer
PAPER JAM
When the paper has jammed during printing.
NO INK
When the ink has not been installed properly or the ink has run out.
LOW INK LEVEL

When there is not much ink left.
WASTE TANK FULL

When the waste ink tank is full.
CANNOT PRINT !
When trying to print a still image recorded by a different camcorder, a still image in a different format, or a still image that was
loaded to a computer and edited.
COULD NOT PRINT * IMAGES

When trying to use the DPOF settings to print a * still images recorded by a different camcorder, a still images in a different
format, or a still images that was loaded to a computer and edited.
SET PRINT ORDER

When trying to use the PRINT command in the Card Playback menu to print a still image not designated for printing.
CANNOT TRIM
When an attempt has been made to trim still images with a 160 120 image size. Alternatively, when an attempt has been made
to trim images whose aspect ratio differs significantly from 4:3.
READJUST TRIMMING
When the Style setting has been changed after trimming was set.
PRINTER ERROR
When trouble has occurred in the printer.
COMMUNICATION ERROR
When an error has occurred during communication.
PRINTER IN USE
79
PRINTER WARMING UP
When the printer is getting ready.
PAPER LEVER ERROR

When the printers paper lever is not at the correct position.
PRINTER COVER OPEN

When the printers cover is open.
NO PRINTHEAD
When the ink head has not been installed in the printer.
FIRMWARE UPDATED
INCOMPATIBLE PEPAR SIZE

When an unavailable paper size was selected in the paper size menu after displaying the paper size menu and changing the
settings at the printer side.
CHECK PRINT SETTINGS

When the printer setting status displays the current recording value and the Easy Direct button was pressed even though this
value cannot be used by PictBridge when the printer is connected.
PRINT ERROR
When a printer error occurs due to unknown reason.
SEND DESIGNATION ERROR
TOO MANY IMAGES DISCONNECT CABLE
CANNOT TRANSFER!
When the Easy Direct button was pressed when a motion video was displayed (SET UP icon and the icons to its right gray out,
and the Easy Direct button lights up) while PC Wallpaper was set.
80
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTON
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B. Functions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
2. Power Supply Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-2 Power Fuses ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
2-3 Power Supply Circuits ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3. Built-in Charger Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
3-2 Operation at Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
3-2-2 Progress of Charging --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
4. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 11
4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
4-4 Audio Signal Flow --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
5. System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
5-3 Servo Control --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
5-5 Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
1. P.C.B. Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-Control Section
IC100 MODE MI-COM System control
IC102 BACK UP MODE MI-COM reset
Camera/Card Section
IC1101 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)
IC1102 SDRAM Memory for DIGIC DV (64M)
IC1103 DIGIC DV Camera digital signal processing, card image processing,
and USB interface
PM Section
IC1810 CHARGE IC Charge control IC
IC1811 OPE AMP Charge detection operational amplifier
IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Power PWM regulator controller
IC3203 4.7V REGULATOR 4.7V regulator
Video Section
IC2000 VRP2 Record playback head amplifier
IC2300 FLASH Memory for FR MI-COM (16M)
IC2301 VIC4 Digital VCR signal processing LSI, IEEE1394 interface,
FR MI-COM, and Analog video input/output signal processing
IC2302 SDRAM Memory for VIC4 (64M)
MO Driver Section
IC300 OPE AMP Operational amplifier for reel sensor
IC301 MOTOR DRIVE Drum, capstan, and loading motor driver
(2) CAV P.C.B.

Camera Section
IC1001 INVERTER Oscillation circuit inverter
IC1002 TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER CCD, TG, CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter,
and CCD V-DRIVER
IC1004 2.8V REGULATOR 2.8V Regulator
IC1200 LENS DRIVE Zoom, focus motor driver, IRIS driver, and gyro output amp
CVF Section
IC1501 EVF DRIVER EVF LCD (CVF) drive
Audio Section
IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE Analog input/output signal processing, speaker amplifier
(3) CCD P.C.B.

IC1070 CCD CCD image sensor
(4) LCD P.C.B.

IC901 EEPROM EEPROM for LCD data
IC902 LCD DRIVE LCD signal processing and drive
IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL Backlight drive
(5) CVF P.C.B.

Signal transfer from CAV P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, back-light LED turn-on
(6) JACK1 P.C.B.

AV JACK, IEEE1394 terminal, External microphone jack, Remote controller photosensor
IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO Pitch-direction angular speed detection
IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO Yaw-direction angular speed detection
1
(7) JACK2 P.C.B.

USB terminal, S terminal
(8) KEY P.C.B.

Memory card slot, various keys
2
2. Power Supply Circuit
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
MAIN P.C.B. KEY P.C.B. EJECT P.C.B. OPERATION

KEY UNIT
FROM
DC JACK
28 LITHIUM EJ SW DMC-III POWER SW
JACK DET
CN101 BATTERY CASSETTE
+ CN91 11 IN SW

23 CN102 CN2102 10 CN303 12 CN101 2 3 1
3 13
IC102 EJECT SW 66
3V BACK UP 80 DC V DET
14 E3V
REG. CAS IN 67
18 E3 DET
DET 4 VTR 76
POWER SW
SW 12 CAMERA 77
VCC POWER SW
RESET 11 10 RESET NET 51

POWER SW
2.6V 2
FROM DET. 25 LI DET
IC100
BATTERY
TERMINAL 71 DC J DET
MODE
+ 5 7
MI-COM.
53 CAM ON
2.5V
REG.
DVDD
52 VTR ON
2.7V
SERIAL
VTR ON
DATA
PM SECTION
IC2301
FR
MI-COM.
(VIC4)
Fig. 1
3
Backup Lithium Battery

LI3V power from the lithium battery is input to pin 3 of the IC102, and it is output from pin 12 as power to the MODE MI-COM.
Thus, the MODE MI-COM performs data backup and clock operation when main power supply is not connected.
When the voltage of the lithium battery decreases below 2.6 V (or when the lithium battery is not loaded), the IC102 outputs the L
signal from pin 2. Upon receipt of this signal at the time of power-on, the MODE MI-COM sends it to the FR MI-COM, which then
issue a lithium battery low-level warning indication.
Main Power Supply

Main power (DC-JACK/BATTERY) is supplied to pin 13 of IC102. Through the internal regulator in IC102, the main power thus
supplied is converted to 3V power, which is output as E3V from pin 14 of IC102. Furthermore, through the internal switch, the
main power is converted to LI3V, which is output from pin 12 of IC102 as a power voltage for driving the MODE MI-COM.
When main power is supplied, the "H" signal is output from pin 4 of the IC101. Upon detection of this "H" signal, the MODE MI-
COM recognizes the main power source has been provided. Then, the COM MI-COM carries out initialization and sets up the
standby state. In this state, the MODE MI-COM performs detection of startup-related switches. When it detects that any one of the
startup-related switches has been turned on, the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals are output from pins 52 or 53, respectively.
Upon output of the CAM ON (H) and VTR ON (H) signals, power to each circuit is turned on.
At power-on of each circuit, a voltage of 2.7/2.5 V is fed to pin 5/7 of the IC102. Then, through the internal switch, power to the
MODE MI-COM is output from pin 12 for saving current consumption.
4
2-2 Power Fuses
MAIN P.C.B.
CN3202
BATT.
BATT. +
TERNINAL
FU3201
CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V,
DC/DC CONVERTOR
CN3211 CN3201 FU3202
LCD, 4.7V, 5V,
DC JACK DC + DC +
VTR UNREG
FU3203
MECHA UNREG
JACK1 P.C.B.
FU3205
SHDE UNREG
FU1810
CHARGE UNREG
Fig. 2
The power supply from the battery DC JACK is supplied to five fuses on the MAIN P.C.B., through which the following five power
voltage are delivered.
(1) CCD, 1.4V, 2.7V, 3V, DC/DC UNREG : FU3201

CCD drive power source (-7V, +15V)
1.4V power source (MACS1.4V, DVDD1.4V, AVDD1.4V)
2.7V power source (M SDRAM2.7V, AA2.7V, SDRAM2.7V, AVDD2.7V, LCD2.7V, DIF2.7V)
3V power source (DVDD3V, CAM3V, HA3V)
DC/DC CONVERTER power source
(2) LCD, 4.7V, 5V, VCR UNREG : FU3202

LCD drive power source (8.5V)
4.7V power source (AA4.7V, HA4.7V)
5V power source (P5V, LCD5V)
VCR UNREG
(3) MECHA UNREG : FU3203

DRUM /CAPSTAN
(4) SHOE UNREG : FU3205

Advanced Accessory shoe power source
(5) CHARGE UNREG : FU1810

Charge circuit power source
5
2-3 Power Supply Circuits

Figure 3 shows the power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF condition of each power supply voltage is controlled by the VTR ON / CAM ON signals output from the MODE MI-COM.
MAIN P.C.B.
LPF MACS 1.4V
46
UNREG
LPF AVDD 1.4V
PWM 50 REG. LPF DVDD 1.4V

CH-1 Q3204
43
UNREG
SDRAM 2.7V
PWM 53 REG. AVDD 2.7V

CH-2 Q3203
IC3201 DIF 2.7V
DC/DC DVDD 2.7V
CONVERTER
CONTROL 40 LPF AA 2.7V
UNREG
M SDRAM 2.7V
PWM 56 REG.
Q3205 LPF LCD 2.7V
CH-3
LPF CAM 3V
DVDD 3V
37
UNREG
HA 3V
IC3203
PWM 57 REG. REG. AA 4.7V
CH-4 Q3206
HA 4.7V
P 5V
21
UNREG
LPF LCD 5V
PWM 60 REG. DRUM VM

CH-5 Q3207
15
UNREG
PWM 61 REG. CAP VM

CH-6 Q3208
11
UNREG
CCD 15V
PWM 62 REG.
CH-7 CCD -7V
Q3201
VTR ON 28 5
30
CAM ON 31
PWM 64 REG. LCD 8.5V

CH-8
Q3202
L3211
Fig. 3
6
3. Built-in Charger Circuit
BATT.
BATTERY TERNINAL CN3202 MAIN P.C.B.
+ + 4,5 BATT +
THERMISTOR T 3 BATT INFO AD
CN1801
1,2 BATT DC IN OFF
MAIN P.C.B.
UNREG PM SECTION
CN3212
DC JACK CN3211 CN3201
+ DC + 1 2 DC +
CN51 CN2101
DETECT DC J SW 4 23 DC J SW
JACK1 P.C.B. A/D V

DC V DET
MAIN P.C.B.
BATT INFO MODE MI-COM
DC J DET
A/D I
IC1811 INIT CHARGE 1 MAIN P.C.B.

Q1814 CHARGE MODE MI-COM
I DETECT CHARGE
FU1810
Q1815
4
1
3
14 15 2 3
VCC IC1810
OUTPUT MB3833A
DRIVE CHARGE
CONTROL Q1813
POWER
OSC SAVE
12 13 7 8
Q1812
Fig. 4
3-1 Outline
The main circuit elements and their functions are as follows.
(1) MODE MI-COM

Control of IC1810
Detection and display of charging progress
Error discrimination and display
Battery type discrimination and DC jack input detection
(2) IC1810 (CHARGE CONTROL)

Charging voltage and charging current control
7
3-2 Operation at Charging
3-2-1 Conditions to Start Charging

When the following conditions are satisfied, the MODE MI-COM (IC100) controls the IC 1810 starts charging.
Conditions Detection Source of detection

1 Main unit power is turned OFF MODE MI-COM -
DC jack is connected. MODE MI-COM pin 71 DC JACK
2
DC JACK DET
Power supplied from DC jack MODE MI-COM pin 80 DC IN
3
DC V DET
UNREG voltage is 8.4 0.3 V. MODE MI-COM pin 87 VTR UNREG.
4
BATT.AD
Battery temperature is within the range of MODE MI-COM pin 88 Battery T terminal
5
-6.8C to 49.3C. BATT.INFO
If the conditions (4) and (5) are not satisfied, a charge error is indicated.
8
3-2-2 Progress of Charging

The IC1810 starts a trickle charge under control of the MODE MI-COM (IC100). The trickle charge continues until the battery voltage
reaches 6.5V. At the point in time when 6.5V is reached, the IC1810 starts a 0.66A quick charge. Then, the charge current decreases
gradually with the progress of charging (because of an increase in impedance of the battery). When the charge current becomes 80 mA
or less, the end-of-charging indication is provided. Thereafter, supplementary charging is performed for 24 minutes at maximum until
the charge current becomes 40 mA or less.
LED flashes once LED flashes twice LED lights up steadily

Charging current
Quick charge 0.66A
When battery voltage

reaches 6.5V, quick
charge starts. 0.56A
An error is indicated if the battery voltage becomes 5.7V or lower during quick
charging or constant-voltage charging.
An error is indicated if the battery temperature is not within the range of
10 C to 52.5 C.
Trickle
100mA
80mA
When the battery voltage
reaches 5.2 V, the trickle
timer (2) is started.
40mA
Trickle1 Trickle2 Quick charge timer Timeout 2-flash Full charge Elapsed
timer timer timer indication Supplementary charge timer time
error at timeout
5min. 135min. 144min.max 204min.max 24min.max

max max
Timeout Timeout
error error
Total timer
Full charge
indication
330min.max at timeout
Fig. 5
9
4. Signal Processing Circuit
4-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit

Figure 6 shows the entire block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
CCD P.C.B. CAV P.C.B.

IC1002
IC1001 TG/CDS/AGC/AD IC801 IC501 CVF
LENS
CCD /V-DRIVER AIF4 EVF DRIVE LCD
SPEAKER IC1101/IC1102
IC1103 SDRAM MEMORY
DIGIC DV CARD
KEY
P.C.B.
USB
IC2301
VIC4
LCD
DV
TERMINAL
IC903
JACK2 P.C.B. IC2302 LCD
SDRAM DRIVE
FR
LCD P.C.B.
MICOM
MIC
MIN AV IC2000
JACK VRP2
REC/PB
HEAD
USB
TERMINAL DIF
JACK1 P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.
Fig. 6
10
4-2 Camera/Card Signal Processing
4-2-1 Camera Motion Picture Recording
64 Mbit SDRAM 64 Mbit SDRAM

IC1101 IC1102
32 bit 32 bit
SDRAM IF
CDS/
Deformation,
AGC/ Synthesis
Drawing
CCD AD/ proc resize nr COMP VIC4
REND
IC1070 TG/ IC2301
V-DRIVER Camera signal
36MHz IC1002 12bit processing JPEG
JPEG CARD IF
36MHz GRAB
FR
AIF MI-COM
IC801 Audio
IC1103
DIGIC DV
Fig. 7
4-2-2 Card Still Picture Recording

IC1101 IC1102
32 bit 32 bit
FR
SDRAM IF DMA MI-COM
RAW YCC 1 YCC 2

CDS/ Deformation, Synthesis
AGC/ Drawing VIC4
COMP
CCD AD/ nr REND IC2301
proc resize
IC1070 TG/
V-DRIVER Camera signal
36MHz IC1002 12bit processing JPEG CARD IF
36MHz
SD
GRAB CARD
AIF
IC801 Audio
IC1103 USB
DIGIC DV
Fig. 8
11
4-2-3 Card Motion Picture Recording

IC1101 IC1102
32 bit 32 bit
SDRAM IF DMA
FR
YCC 1 YCC 2 MI-COM
CDS/
Deformation, Synthesis
AGC/ VIC4
Drawing COMP
CCD AD/ IC2301
REND
IC1001 TG/ proc resize nr
V-DRIVER
IC1002 Camera signal
36MHz 12bit
36MHz processing JPEG CARD IF SD
GRAB CARD
AIF Audio
IC801
IC1103
DIGIC DV
Fig. 9
<CCD> IC1001
1/4.5 inches interlaced CCD
Complementary color filter
Total number of pixels Approx. 1,330,000
Effective number of pixels Tape : Approx. 860,000 / Card : Approx. 1,230,000
<CDS/AGC/AD/TG/V-DRIVER> IC1002
A signal read out of the CCD is extracted. Then, after the extracted signal is subjected to AGC processing and A/D conversion, it
is output as a digital signal.
<DIGIC DV> IC1103

This circuit carries out various camera signal processing operations (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. It also performs
multimedia-application signal processing mainly for still image recording.
Feature engine
High-speed card interface
JPEG
Audio data compression (ADPCM)
USB function
<SDRAM> IC1102, IC1101

Field memory for camera signal processing and digital effect processing
Image data memory for Memory card write/read operation
12
4-3 Recorder Signal Processing
VIC BLOCK DIF BLOCK
IC2302 SDRAM DIF DV

SDRAM INTERFACE INTERFACE TERMINAL
VIDEO
A DATA HEAD
IC1103 VIDEO REC/PB IC2000
COMPRESSION ECC
DIGIC B DATA INTERFACE PROCESS VRP2
/DEMOD.
DV
75 AUDIO IC801 AV
D/A A/D BUS
DRIVE INTERFACE AIF4 JACK
AV JACK
S TERMINAL MI-COM. BLOCK
R,G,B Cache CO-
CVF FR MI-COM. 1K Byte processer
LCD
IC2301
LCD VIC4
Fig. 10
< VIC4 >IC2301

The VIC, MI-COM, DIF INTERFACE and VIDEO INTERFACE circuits are integrated on a single semiconductor chip.
A/B DATA : Input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIGIC DV digital effect circuit is
used at playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC4 are subjected to digital VCR format signal processing. Audio data,
subcode data and ITI data are also created at VIC4, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of
DV format.
DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital
input, the data enters VIC4 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000

Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC4 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC4.
13
4-4 Audio Signal Flow
L
MIC R IC1103 IC2301 IC2000
DIGIC DV VIC4 VRP2
MEM IF CARD IF
L REC/
HEAD
R PB
PHONE
L IC801 HEAD
AV AIF4 SDRAM CARD
R
JACK
Serial
SPEAKER FR
DRIVER MI-COM.
B EEP
SPEAKER
Fig. 11
< AIF >IC801

Out ALC (Auto Level Control), fading, and amplification of various output signals. For the beep tone issued at ejection, etc., the
signal from the FR MI-COM is generated in the circuit and changed over in the AIF.
The microphone amplifier, HPF, ALC, A/D, D/A, and digital I/F, SPEAKER DRIVER with ALC circuits are contained in this IC.
It is also used for changeover between ordinary voice sound and beep sound.
< VIC4 >

The following processing operations are carried out for reducing noise from the DMC mechanism.
Noise cancellation based on correlation of V-cycle noise components.
Noise component reduction by means of trapping.
< Automatic wind noise cutting>

For efficient reduction of wind noise, the cutoff frequency of the wind noise cutting HPF circuit is regulated according to the
current level of wind noise.
AIF4 DIGIC VIC4

DV
(L) HPF L+R
MIC
IN
(R) HPF HPF LR
WIND
150Hz 600Hz DETECT 40Hz 3kHz
(L R)
FR
MI-COM.
Fig. 12
14
5. System Control, Servo
5-1 Outline of System Control, Servo

Figure 13 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is performed
by the FR MI-COM (IC2301) and MODE MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.
ZOOM MAIN P.C.B.

D-VS
PHOTO UNIT IC3201 C-VS
DRUM
DRUM M
DC/DC D-VM DRIVER
ZOOM SW CONVERTER
C-VM
PHOTO SW
FG/PG
D-ERR
CAPSTAN
C-ERR CAPSTAN M
DFG/PG DRIVER
JACK1 P.C.B. VIC
CFG
FG
IC301
REMOTE CONTROL MOTOR
IC2301
SIGNAL RECEIVER DRIVER
VIC4
LOADING
LOADING
M
DRIVER
JACK2 P.C.B.
IC2000
SELECT SW VRP2
FR HEAD
MI-COM IC2300
FLASH MODE SW
C.DOWN SW
BOT/EOT
SENS.
DEW
IC801 REEL FG
OPERATION AIF4
KEY UNIT
START/STOP
SW
MIC
POWER SW
IC100
MODE
EJECT SW MI-COM
R-KEY
DMC III
IRIS IC1103
DRIVE IC1200 DIGIC
LENS LENS DV LCD P.C.B.
MOTOR DRIVER MEMORY
DRIVE CARD
IC901
EEPROM
IC1002
CDS
AGC IC1501 IC903
A/D TG EVF LCD
V-DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER
CAV P.C.B. KEY P.C.B.
Fig. 13
15
5-2 Major Functions of Each MI-COM

(1) FR MI-COM (IC2301 : VIC4)
The FR MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through communi-
cation with MODE MI-COM. It also detects of various sensors and switches (DMCIII). Following are the major functions.
VIC (Video) control / AIF4 (Audio Interface) controls
Control in accordance with IEEE1394
USB interface control
AUDIO control
DMC III mechanism control
DIGIC DV control
Card control
CCD drive control
AE, AF, AWB control
EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control
OSD (On Screen Display) bitmap control
PRINTER control
* The FR MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the FR
MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data
modification regarding the FR MI-COM.
(2) MODE MI-COM (IC100)

The MODE MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.
Key input
LCD / EVF control
Remote control input
Power ON/OFF control
Built-in charge circuit control
MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
* The MODE MI-COM in this machine does not have a dedicated EEPROM. Since a flash ROM is used for the
FR MI-COM as a substitute for the EEPROM, it is required to update the flash ROM after adjustment and data
modification regarding the FR MI-COM.
16
5-3 Servo Control

Servo control is carried out by the VIC4 (VIC and FR MI-COM). The FR MI-COM is used for servo control of motor ON/OFF and
rotational direction, and the VIC is used to output rotational speed and phase control signals. More specifically in terms of signal
flow, the VIC detects the FG/PG and PB-RF signals from the motor, and sends the detected signal information to the FR MI-COM.
Then, the FR MI-COM generates an error signal to be output to the VIC. Thereafter, the VIC outputs an error signal (PWM), which
is driven on the MAIN P.C.B. for sending a control voltage to the motor driver IC.
DC/DC
CONVERTER
DRUM VM
DRUM VS
CAP VM
CAP VS
LOAD ON/ DMC III
UNLOAD FR LOAD+/LOAD-
LOADING MOTOR
DERR IC301 U/V/W

DRUM MOTOR
MO DRIVE
VIC4 CERR Ucoil/Vcoil/Wcoil
CAPSTAN MOTOR
DA CFG CFG2
DA S REEL
S REEL Hall SENSOR
DA T REEL
T REEL Hall SENSOR
Fig. 14
17
5-4 Personal Computer Connection Mode (USB)
IC1101
SDRAM
IC1103
IC1002 DIGIC DV
Still Picture
IC1001 TG/CDS MEMORY
Signal
CCD AGC/AD CARD
Processing
/V-DRIVER
Signal flow of (in) FR USB USB

Card camera mode MI-COM CONTROLER TERMINAL
Signal flow of (in)

Personal computer
connection mode
Fig. 15
In the card camera mode, an image signal produced in the camera section is sent to the memory card via the DIGIC DV. In the
personal computer connection mode, the USB terminal and the memory card are connected through the USB controller.
The FR MI-COM performs control of changeover between the card camera mode and the personal computer connection mode.
18
5-5 Error Detection

If an abnormality has been occurred in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD
indicates PLEASE UNLOAD THE CASSETTE and blinks EJECT.
5-5-1 Error Detecting Conditions

The following table gives error detecting conditions.
Kind Condition Detection
Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG
FG frequency when steady 900Hz
Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG
FG frequency when steady 1347Hz
Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.
Steady : 60Hz max.
Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 2sec.
Reel error Error detecting mode Starting / Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG
Error detection Normally : The C-FG count per reel FG cycle is C-FG
Starting : M ore than 3296
Steady : M ore than 2256
UNLOAD : Reel FG cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error Error detecting mode M ode transfer M ode SW
Error detection M ode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
5-5-2 Processing after Error Detection

The following table gives processing after error detection.
Pop up : Error displayerror eject pop up error clear
Error stop : Error displaySTOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
During Loading During tape During mode
Cassette in Loading
unloading completed running transfer
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop
19
DISASSEMBLING
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling
Notes
List of Supplies
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
1-8 Separation of Shields ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
1-9 Separation of CVF Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
1-11 Separation of Camera Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B. ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 24
1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
1-37 List of Screws Used ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 48
1-38 List of Disassembly Photos ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
DISASSEMBLING
1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (1)

Notes
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
Lateral engaging connector Lengthwise engaging connector

( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce- ( The instructions are given in the disassembly proce-
dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.) dure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side) Indicated by Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the
: Contacts are positioned upward. shafts indicate the noncontacts.
Metal contact (Pins' face down)

Metal contact
Metal contact (Pins' face up)

Metal contact
:
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8011-000)

(4) If any part to be replaced has UL tape attached on it, be sure to reattach UL tape at the same position in reassembling.
(5) Use the new type connector (MAIN P.C.B. CN102) as illustrated.
FPC FPC
Metal
contact
Metal
contact
Lock Unlock
(6) For replacing the fuse mounted on the MAIN P.C.B., it is required to remove the CVF unit.
1
DISASSEMBLING
1. Disassembling and Reassembling - (2)

List of Supplies
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks
Grease FLOIL C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication DMC III
Grease FLOIL 948P DY9-3051-000 Lubrication DMC III
Hanal FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover
Hanal KS-39M DY9-3053-000 Lubrication Cover
Hanal KS-50M DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover, DMC III
EM-30L DY9-3031-000 Lubrication Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663G CY9-8129-000 Adhesive LCD
Sponge (W H T : 300mm 200mm 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive T ape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W L T : 9mm 50m 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive T ape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W L T : 10mm 50m 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W H : 250mm 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
2
DISASSEMBLING
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart

(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
START : MAIN FLOW
: SUB FLOW
: MAIN UNIT
1-4 R-LCD Unit 1-22 KEY P.C.B.
1-23 Right Cover Unit 1-24 Right Cover Ass'y
1-23 LCD Unit 1-25 LCD Hinge Unit
1-5 Rear Cover Unit 1-29 Power Switch Ass'y 1-26 LCD Ass'y
1-29 Rear Cover 1-26 Backlight Ass'y
1-6 Front Cover Unit 1-15 Jack1 P.C.B. 1-26 LCD P.C.B.
1-16 Mic Ass'y
1-17 Front Cover Ass'y
1-7 Left Cover Unit 1-18 Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
1-19 Speaker
1-20 Cassette Arm Ass'y
1-8 Camera Recorder CVF Unit 1-9 CVF Unit 1-33 CVF Ass'y
1-10 Jack2 P.C.B. 1-33 CVF P.C.B.
1-11 Recorder Unit 1-12 CAV P.C.B.
1-13 Main P.C.B.
1-14 DMC lll
1-11 Camera Unit 1-35 CCD P.C.B.
1-35 CCD Ass'y
1-35 Lens Ass'y

END
3
DISASSEMBLING
1-2 Separation of Accessory Shoe and LI Battery Holder

(1) Remove four screws (a 4), and detach the Accessory Shoe.
(2) Open the LCD Unit, and detach the LI Battery Holder.
<Note on Reassembling>
(1) Tighten the four screws (a 4) on the Accessory Shoe in a diagonal sequence.
(1) - a
Accessory Shoe
ACC Cover
(1)
LCD Unit
(2)
(2)
LI Battery Holder
a
5mm
Metal
M1.7
Flat Head Screw
Fig. 1
4
DISASSEMBLING
1-3 Separation of Top Cover Assy

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove one screw (b 1).
(2) Disengage claws A and B. While being free from part E of the Shoe Connector, pull up the claw A and claw B sides to demount the
Top Cover Assy.
(1) When remounting the Top Cover Assy, engage claws B and C first. Then, while being free from the part E of the Shoe Connector,
insert the claw A and part D sides for engagement.
Part D Top Cover Ass'y
Claw A
Claw C
(1) - b
Claw B
(2)
Cassette Cover
(1)
Part E
b
5mm
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 2
5
DISASSEMBLING
1-4 Separation of R-LCD Unit

(1) Remove eleven screws (c 1, d 5, e 2, f 2, g 1), disconnect the CN101, and detach the R-LCD Unit.
(1) - e
(1) - d
(1) - d
R-LCD Unit
(1) - d
(1) - d
(1) - c
(1) CN101
(1)
(1) - f
(1) - g (1) - e
(1) - f
(1) - d
(1) - f
(1) - f
c d e f g
6mm 3mm 4mm 5mm 4mm
Metal Metal Metal
Metal M1.7 Metal
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
M1.7 (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 3
6
DISASSEMBLING
1-5 Separation of Rear Cover Unit

(1) Disengage the Grip Belt from the Grip Hook.
(2) Open the Cassette Cover, and remove four screws (d 1, h 3).
(3) Disconnect the CN101 and CN3202, and detach the Rear Cover Unit.
Grip Belt
Grip Hook
(1)
Cassette Cover
(2)
(2) - h
(3)
(2) - h
(2) - d
CN3202 (3)
CN101
(3)
(2) - h
Rear Cover Unit

d h
3mm 3.5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 4
7
DISASSEMBLING
1-6 Separation of Front Cover Unit

(1) Open the Jack1 Cover and Jack2 Cover, and remove six screws (h 4, i 1, j 1).
(2) Disconnect the CN3211, CN42, and CN51. Then, while being free from the Lens Shield, detach the Front Cover Unit.
(Refer to 1-8 : Separation of Shields.)
CN42 (1) - j
CN51
CN3211
(1) - h
Jack1 Cover
(1)
(2) Lens Shield
(1) - h (2)
(1) - h (2)
(2)
(1) Jack2 Cover
(1) - i h
(1) - h 3.5mm
Metal
M1.7
i j
2mm
5.5mm
Metal
Metal M1.7
(1) - i (1) - h M1.7
Fig. 5
8
DISASSEMBLING
1-7 Separation of Left Cover Unit

(1) Remove four screws (k 4).
(2) Open the Cassette Cover, disconnect the CN100, and then detach the Left Cover Unit.
(1) In reassembling the Left Cover Unit, connect the CN100 first. Then, mount the Left Cover Unit while taking sufficient care not to
damage the flexible cable.
(1) - k
Left Cover Unit

Cassette Cover
(1) - k
(2)
(2)
(1) - k
(1) - k
CN100
(2)
k
2.5mm (1) - k
Metal
M1.7
Fig. 6
9
DISASSEMBLING
1-8 Separation of Shields

(1) Remove three screws (j 2, k 1), and then detach the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit.
Part A (1) - j
Part C (1)
(1)
A
Part B
Part F
Part D
(1)
Lens Shield A
Lens Shield B
(1) - j Part E
(1)
FPC Shield Unit
j k
2mm 2.5mm
Metal Metal
(1) - k M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 7
10
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Reassemble the Lens Shield, Lens Shield B, and FPC Shield Unit as illustrated below.
(Refer to 1-6 : Separation of Front Cover Unit.)
(2) Attach the FPC Shield above the CAV-JACK1 FPC (8 pins) to provide a distance as large as possible. With the MAIN-KEY FPC
folded, it shall not come into direct contact with the CAV-JACK1 FPC.
Note on Reassembling (1)
A Part of Lens Shield
C Part of FPC Shield
Front Cover
Refer to 1-6:Separation of Front Cover Unit.
B Part of Lens Shield
D Part of Lens Shield B
E Part of Lens Shield B
F Part of CVF Unit
Lug terminal mounting

angle : Within 45.0
MAIN-KEY FPC
CAV-JACK1 FPC FPC Sheld Unit
Fig. 8
11
DISASSEMBLING
1-9 Separation of CVF Unit

(1) Detach the Shoe Connector Assy. (MVX250i E only)
(2) Disconnect the CN891, and detach the ACS-MAIN FPC. (MVX250i E only)
(3) Remove three screws (k 2, h 1), and then detach the Shoe Base and GND Plate.
(4) Turn up the CVF Unit, remove one screw (h 1), disconnect the CN1501, and demount the CVF Unit.
(1) Before using a service part of GND Plate, attach the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.
(2) Attach the GND plate to the Shoe Base as illustrated below.
(3) - k
ACS-MAIN FPC
Shoe Connector Ass'y
(1)
MVX250i E only
Note on Reassembling (1) MVX250i E only

GND Plate
(3) - k (3) - h
Shoe Base
(3)
A surplus part of the UL (3)

Attachment Tape shall be folded CVF Unit
reference onto the back side. GND Plate
(2)
UL Tape (9 25)
Attach the UL tape before reassembling.
(4) - h
(4)
(4)
Shoe Base GND Plate
(2)
h k
CN1501
3.5mm 2.5mm CN891
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 9
12
DISASSEMBLING
1-10 Separation of JACK 2 P.C.B.

(1) Detach the Cushion RC1 and RC2.
(2) Remove two screws (k 2), disconnect the CN91, and detach the JACK2 P.C.B.
(3) Detach the CAV-JACK1 FPC and MAIN-JACK1 FPC from the CN701 and CN2101.
(1) Before mounting the JACK2 P.C.B., run the MAIN-JACK1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 FPC, and MAIN-JACK1 Cable through groove A.
(2) Attach the Cushion RC1 and RC2 to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1),(2)

CAV-JACK1 FPC
JACK2 P.C.B.
MAIN-JACK1 FPC
Cushion RC2
Align to the
Groove A hole center.
1.5mm
Align to a point 1.5 mm above
the edge of the P.C.B.
MAIN-JACK1 Cable Align to the outline

Cushion RC1 of the DV Connector.
k
2.5mm
Metal
M1.7
CN701
JACK2 P.C.B. (2)
(3)
(2) - k
CN2101
(2) - k
CN91
(3)
(1) CAV-JACK1 FPC
Cushion RC2
(2)
(1)
Cushion RC1
MAIN-JACK1 FPC
Fig. 10
13
DISASSEMBLING
1-11 Separation of Camera Unit

(1) Remove two screws (j 1, l 1), and then detach the Sub Holder and Insulation Rubber.
(2) Remove two screws (l 2), detach the UL Tape, and disconnect the CN1000 and CN1200. Then, detach the Camera Unit, Ferrite
Core, and Insulation Rubber.
(1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated.
<Instruction for Supply>

Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Instruction for Supply Note on Reassembling (1)
Insulation Rubber Attachment

reference
Fold the
UL tape.
Hanal KS-39M
Ferrite Core
Rear View
UL Tape (9 30)
(2) - l
Insulation Rubber
j l
Recorder Unit
2mm 4.5mm
Metal
M1.7 Metal
Insulation Rubber M1.7
Steped Screw
Ferrite Core
(2) - l
(2)
UL Tape (9 30)
(2)
(2)
CN1000
CN1200
(2)
Sub Holder
(1) - j
(1) - l
Camera Unit
Insulation Rubber
Fig. 11
14
DISASSEMBLING
1-12 Separation of CAV P.C.B.

(1) Disconnect the CN1001 and CN1100 (B to B), and then detach the CAV P.C.B.
(2) Disconnect the CN3201, remove the UL Tape, and detach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable.
(3) Disconnect the CN102 and CN2102, and then detach the MAIN-KEY FPC and MAIN-JACK2 FPC.
Note : Use the CN102 (MAIN P.C.B.) as illustrated below.
(4) Remove the UL Tape from the MAIN-KEY FPC, and detach the Ferrite Core.
(1) With the UL Tape, secure the Ferrite Core to the position indicated in the figure below so that it will not be dislocated.
(2) Attach the MAIN-JACK1 Cable as illustrated below, and then secure it with the UL Tape.
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2)
MAIN-KEY FPC Ferrite Core Run the cable through a clearance between the ICs and
the connectors so that it is not pinched between them.
CN3201
CN3202
UL Tape (13 21) CN1100
CN101
Note IC100
IC301
FPC FPC
Contact IC300
Contact
UL Tape
(9 36)
CN100 CN302 CN303
Locked Unlocked CN3201 MAIN - JACK1 Cable
(2)
CN102
(1)
CAV P.C.B.
CN2102
CN1100
(B to B)
(2)
(3)
MAIN - JACK2 FPC
CN1001
(3) (4) UL Tape (B to B)
(9 36)
(4)
UL Tape (13 21)

MAIN - KEY FPC
Ferrite Core
Fig. 12
15
DISASSEMBLING
1-13 Separation of MAIN P.C.B.

(1) Remove three screws (k 3), UL Tape, and disconnect the CN300, CN301, CN302, and CN2000. Then, detach the MAIN P.C.B.
(2) Detach the HA Shield, Shielding Rubber, PM1 Shield and PM2 Shield, from the MAIN P.C.B.
(3) Detach the Core Cushion
PM2 Shield
MAIN P.C.B.
(1) - k Shielding
(2) Rubber
Core
Cushion
A (2)
(2)
B
CN302 (3)
HA Shield (1)
(1) (2) CN300

CN2000
CN303
UL Tape CN301 PM1 Shield
(9 20)
(1) - k
k
A
2.5mm B
Metal
M1.7
(1) - k
Fig. 13
16
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Attach the Core Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.
(2) Attach the Shielding Rubber to the PM Shield as illustrated below.
(3) Secure the flexible cable by attaching the UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) MAIN P.C.B. Note on Reassembling (3) UL Tape (9 20)
Top end MAIN P.C.B.
Attachment
of IC
reference
Motor
End of P.C.B. Core Cushion The UL tape shall not protrude from
the outline of the Motor.

Take care not to let the Shielding Rubber
be sandwiched between the MAIN P.C.B.
and the MAIN Holder.
It is not allowed to attach

the Shielding Rubber in
an overlaying form.
PM2 Shield
When attaching the Shielding Rubber, push it
to the part A of the Recorder Holder so that PM1 Shield
the MAIN P.C.B. will not be unseated.
Part A
Recorder
MAIN P.C.B.
Holder
PM1 Shield
Shielding Rubber
Shielding Rubber
PM Shield
MAIN P.C.B.
Attachment reference
Fig. 14
17
DISASSEMBLING
1-14 Separation of Recorder Holder

(1) Remove three screws (m 3), and detach the Spring, Recorder Holder, and Insulation Rubber.

Entire surface of Insulation Rubber : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
DMC III
Recorder Holder
Insulation Rubber
(1) - m
m
3.4mm
Metal
M1.4
Steped Screw
(1)
Insulation Rubber Instruction for Supply
(1) - m
Insulation Rubber
Spring
Hanal KS-39M
Insulation Rubber (1) - m
Fig. 15
18
DISASSEMBLING
1-15 Disassembly of Front Cover Unit - 1

(1) Detach the Jack2 Cover.
(2) Disconnect the CN43, and remove three screws (e 1, f 1, h 1). Then, detach the Cushion, GND Plate, LED Window, and
JACK1 P.C.B.
(3) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to disengage the dowel A, and detach the Jack2 Panel.
Jack2 Panel
Dowel A
(2) - e
(3)
JACK1 P.C.B.
(2)
(2)
(1) CN43
Jack2 Cover (2) - f
LED Window
GND Plate
Cushion
(2)
(2) - h
e f h
4mm 5mm 3.5mm
Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
(self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 16
19
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Slide the Jack2 Panel in the arrow direction to engage the dowel A with the claw B so that the Jack2 Plate is attached to the Jack2
Cover securely.
(2) Attach the GND Plate and LED Window as illustrated below.
(3) Attach the Cushion as illustrated below.

1. Insert the top end part A of the Cushion in the arrow
direction, and pull it outward as shown in the figure.
Peel-off sheet side
Jack2 Panel
Dowel A
A
Jack2 Cover A LED Window
Cushion
Claw B 2. Insert the part B of the Cushion into a gap between
the LED Window Cylinder and the CN51, and remove
the peel-off sheet from the Cushion.
Note on Reassembling (2) CN51
Cylinder
LED Window
B
Cushion B LED Window
3. Align the end of the cutout part of the F Side Cover

with the edge part C of the Cushion, align the end
face D with the wall face of the F Side Cover, and
attach the Cushion by turning the part B.
GND Plate
C LED Window
Part C
D
Insert part C of the D
GND Plate under B C
the LED Window. Cushion B
4. Attach the Cushion by folding the parts E and F.
LED Window
F
E
Cushion F
Fig. 17
20
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Detach the Front Cushion
(2) Remove three screws (f 3), and detach the MIC Plate, F Base Plate, MIC Rubber, MIC Assy, MIC Shield, and MIC Sheet.
(3) Detach the Cushion. (MVX250i E only)
MVX250i E
only
Cushion
(3)
F Base Plate
MIC Sheet
MIC Shield
(2) - f
MIC Ass'y
(2) MIC Rubber

(2) - f
MIC Plate
(1)
Front Cushion
f
5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 18
21
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Attach the Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below. (MVX250i E only)
(2) Carry out wiring for the MIC Assy Cable as illustrated below.
(3) Attach the Front Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.
Note on Reassembling (1) MVX250i E

only
Cushion
Align the LED window with the dent
part of the Cushion.
(Attach the Cushion so that it will not
protrude onto the LED window.)
Arrange the four cable wires

in parallel so that they are not
crossed over each other.
Red / Black White / Black

Arrange the four cable
wires in parallel, and
Note on Reassembling (3) run them between
the dowels.
The top part of the F Cover shall be turned onto
the cylindrical wall.
L side R side
White / Black Red / Black
Attachment
reference
for Front
Cushion
Align the slit and the rib.
Fig. 19
22
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Remove three screws (f 3), and detach the Lens Ring Assy, MEGA PIXEL Plate, and Lens Rubber.
(2) Using tweezers or the like, push the claw A to remove the Jack1 Cover.
(3) Detach the Front Panel.
Note : When detaching the Front Panel, push part B from the back side.
(1) When attaching the Front Panel, engage the claws C, D, E, F in that order.
(2) Attach the MEGA PIXEL Plate to the Lens Ring Assy, and insert the Lens Rubber in the orientation indicated in the figure below
for attachment to the Front Cover Assy.
Jack1 Cover
Jack1 Cover (1) - f
(2)
Push
Claw A
Claw A Lens Rubber
MEGA PIXEL Plate (1) - f

Lens Ring Ass'y (1)
(1)
Front Panel (1) Front Cover Ass'y

f
5mm Note on Reassembling (1)
Metal (3)
M1.7 Claw D
Claw E
(self tap)

Claw F Claw C
MEGA PIXEL Plate
Front Cover Ass'y
Note
Push
Part B
Lens Rubber
Lens Ring Ass'y
Fig. 20
23
DISASSEMBLING
1-18 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove five screws (d 4, t 1).
(2) Disengage two claws A and two dowels B of the Zoom Photo Key Assy. Then, with the Zoom Photo Key Assy unseated, detach
the Open Knob.
(3) Slide the claws C and D and the dowels E and F downward, remove the Double Sided Tape from the SPEAKER FPC, and detach
the Cassette Cover.
(4) Disconnect the connector from the SPEAKER FPC Unit, and detach the Zoom Photo Key Assy.
(5) Detach the Zoom Top Cover and the Zoom Top Cover Tape1, 2.
Zoom Top Cover
Zoom Top Cover Tape 2 (5)
Zoom Top Cover Tape 1
(5)
Claw A
Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
(1) - d
(1) - d
Open Knob
Dowel B
(2)
(1) - t
(4)
Dowel E Dowel F
(3)
(4)
Connector
Claw C Claw D
Double Sided Tape
Connector
(1) - d
Cassette Cover
d t
3mm 4.5mm
Metal Black
M1.7 M1.7
SPEAKER FPC (self tap)
Fig. 21
24
DISASSEMBLING
(1) When attaching the SPEAKER FPC, engage the dowels F and G of the Cassette Cover and secure the SPEAKER FPC with Double
Sided Tape.
(2) When attaching the Cassette Cover, connect the Zoom Photo Key Assy flexible cable to the connector. Then, engage the claws C
and D and the dowels E and F while taking care not to dislocate the Speaker.
(3) When attaching the Zoom Photo Key Assy, mount the Open Knob and then engage the claws A (two points) and the dowels B (two
points) in that order.

Open Knob : EM-30L (DY9-3031-000)
Note on Reassembling (1),(2)
Cassette Cover Double Sided Tape

Dowel E Dowel G Connector Dowel F
SPEAKER FPC
Claw C Speaker Claw D
Note on Reassembling (3) Instruction for Supply

Zoom Photo Key Ass'y
Open Knob Lower Part
Open Knob
EM-30L
Dowel B
Claw A
Fig. 22
25
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Open the Cassette Cover, detach the Regulation Sheet, and remove one screw (h 1), and theL Cover Cushion.
Note : Since the Double Sided Tape has a high strength of adhesion, take care not to flaw the Regulation Sheet when
detaching it.
(2) Remove two screws (d 1, t 1), UL Tape and detach the Left Cover Shield.
(3) Disengage the dowels A (two points) and the claw B. Then, demount the Speaker, and the SPEAKER FPC.
(4) Detach the Speaker Cushion.
(5) Remove solder () (two points), and separate the Speaker from the SPEAKER FPC.
SPEAKER FPC
(5) - UL Tape (9 30)
(3)
(4)
Speaker
Speaker Cushion
(3)
(2)
(1)
Regulation Sheet
(1) - h
Claw B
Claw C (2) - t
Dowel A
(1) (2)
L Cover Cushion Left Cover Shield
(2) - d
d h t
3mm 3.5mm 4.5mm
Metal Metal Black
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 23
26
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Attach the Speaker Cushion to the position indicated in the figure below.
(2) Attach the SPEAKER FPC to the position indicated in the figure below, and secure it with the claw C of the Left Cover Shield.
(3) Attach the L Cover Cushion as illustrated below.
(4) Attach the UL Tape as illustrated below.
Note on Reassembling (1) Note on Reassembling (2) Note on Reassembling (3)

Speaker Cushion
When attaching the SPEAKER Attachment
FPC, engage the dowels A and reference
claw B.
Speaker
Attach the Speaker Cushion

along the outline of the metallic
part of the Speaker. L Cover Cushion
Allowable deviation in Left Cover
Dowel A Claw B
attachment : 0.5mm
Secure with the claw C.
The root of the flexible cable

shall be attached to meet
the internal radius of the cover.
UL Tape (9 30)
After attaching the UL tape,
make sure that the FPC is
not kinky.
(To prevent deviation of the
outward position of the FPC) D
In the range D, the dimensions indicated

in the figure shall be satisfied.
0 5.0mm 0 5.0mm
Fig. 24
27
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Remove four screws (d 1, t 3), and detach the Cassette Arm Assy, Grip Hook Pin, and Grip Hook.
(2) Remove one screw (d 1), and detach the Click Spring.
(3) Detach the GND Tape1, 2 and the Cassette Arm Sheet.
Left Cover
GND Tape 2
(1) - d Dowel A
(2) - d
Click Spring
GND Tape 1
(3) (2)
(3)
(1)
(1) - t
(1)
Grip Hook
Cassette Arm Ass'y
Grip Hook Pin (1)

(1) - t
(3)
d t
3mm 4.5mm (1) - t
Metal Black Cassette Arm Sheet
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 25
28
DISASSEMBLING
(1) Attach the GND Tape1 to the position indicated in the figure below.
(2) Attach the GND Tape2 to the position indicated in the figure below.
(3) Attach the Click Spring and the Cassette Arm Sheet as illustrated below.
(4) With the Cassette Arm Assy open, attach it to the dowel A of the Left Cover and then secure the screw.

Click Spring, two dented spherical points : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Left Cover
Click Spring
Attach the GND Tape1 Cassette
so that it is secured to Arm Ass'y
the concave part of the
GND Tape1
Left Cover.
Attach according to the outline
(The GND Tape1 shall Cassette of the Cassette Arm Ass'y.
not be unseated.) Arm Sheet No interference with the Stopper
shall occur at the time of turning.
Stopper Allowable deviation of
attachment : 0.5 mm.

Fold the hatched part to the back side.
(Fold through an angle 180 according to the shape of the cutout.)
GND Tape 2
Allowable deviation in attachment,

unless otherwise specified : 0.5 mm.
Align the cutout part with the stepped

Align with the end face of the left cover. part of the left cover.
(Protrusion is not allowed.) (Protrusion is not allowed.)
Instruction for Supply
Click Spring
Hanal FL-778
Fig. 26
29
DISASSEMBLING
1-21 Disassembly of R-LCD Unit - 1

(1) Remove one screw (f 1), and detach the Rubber Insulation and the Tripod Base.
(2) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the Hold Label and the GND Plate.
(3) Remove one screw (f 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the LI Case.
<Notes on Reassembling>
(1) Attach the Hold Label to the position indicated in the figure below.
Hold Label GND Plate
(1)
Tripod Base
Craw A
(1) (3)
(1) - f
(2) Craw B
Rubber Insulation
(2) - e
(2)
LI Case
(3) - f
GND Plate
Hold Label e f
4mm 5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 27
30
DISASSEMBLING

(1) While being free from the GND Plate, disengage the dowels A and B and the claw C. Then, disconnect the CN102, and detach the
KEY P.C.B.
(1) With the LCD Unit open, attach the KEY P.C.B. to the dowels A and B and the claw C. (Take care not to damage the Switch part.)
GND Plate
LCD Unit
(1)
Claw C
KEY P.C.B.
Dowel A
(1)
Dowel B
CN102
KEY P.C.B.
Note on Reassembling (1) Dowel A GND Plate
Claw C
Switch part
KEY P.C.B. Dowel B
Fig. 28
31
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Remove two screws (f 2), and detach the Hinge Cover, the GND Plate and the LCD Unit. (Turn the Hinge part of the LCD Unit
through an angle of 90 beforehand.)
(1) To the Right Cover Unit, attach the GND Plate, the LCD Unit and the Hinge Cover in that order, and secure then with the screws.
In reassembling, run the LCD FPC through part A of the Hinge Cover.
LCD Unit
A
(1)
(1)
GND Plate
A (1) - f
(1)
Right Cover Unit Hinge Cover

(1) - f
Hinge Cover
f
Part A 5mm
Metal
M1.7
LCD FPC (self tap)
Fig. 29
32
DISASSEMBLING
1-24 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit

(1) Detach the LED Guide.
(2) Open the Card Cover, disengage the dowel A, and detach the Card Cover Hook.
(3) Pull out the Shaft, and detach the Card Cover.
Note : Take sufficient care not to lose the Shaft.
(4) Introduce tweezers of thin end into the part B, and detach the Blindfold Sheet.
(1) Attach the Card Cover Hook as illustrated below.
Note on Reassembling (1) (4)

Part B
Card Cover Hook
Dowel A
Blindfold Sheet
Blindfold Sheet
Right Cover Ass'y
Shaft
Press in, and then pull out (3)
Card Cover Hook

LED Guide
(1)
Dowel A
(2)
(3)
(2)
Card Cover
Fig. 30
33
DISASSEMBLING
1-25 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 1

(1) Turn the LCD Hinge Unit through an angle of 90, and remove two screws (g 2).
(2) Disengage the claws A, B, C and D in that order, and detach the LCD Top Cover.
Note : Take care not to damage the claw hooking parts E and F of the LCD Bottom Cover.
(3) Disconnect the CN901 and CN903, and then detach the LCD Hinge Unit and the LCD DETECT FPC.
(1) Attach the LCD Top Cover as illustrated below.
LCD DETECT FPC (3)
(1)
CN903
(3)
(3)
LCD Hinge Unit

E
(3)
Claw A
(1) - g
F
(2)
CN901
(1) - g
Claw C
g
LCD Top Cover
4mm
Claw D
Metal
Claw B M1.7
Insert the IC part of the DETECT FPC

into the groove.
Fold a surplus part of the flexible cable inside.
Fig. 31
34
DISASSEMBLING
1-26 Disassembly of LCD Unit - 2

(1) Remove solder () (three points), disconnect the LCD Sheet, UL Tape, CN902. Then, detach the LCD P.C.B., the LCD Holder, the
Back Light Assy, and the LCD Assy.
(2) Disengage the claw A, and detach the LCD Open Knob, the Shaft, and the Spring.
LCD Bottom Cover

LCD Ass'y
Claw A
Back Light Ass'y
LCD Holder
(1)
LCD Sheet
(2)
(1) Spring
LCD P.C.B. (1)
(1)
(1) -
LCD Sheet
UL Tape (1)
LCD Open Knob
(1)
Shaft
(1) - (1)
CN902
(1) -
Fig. 32
35
DISASSEMBLING
(1) At the end of reassembling, solder three points ().
(2) While holding the Shaft and Spring, attach the LCD Open Knob over the claw A.
(3) Attach the LCD Sheet and UL Tape to the position indicated in the figure below.

Solder
Shaft
Fold the lead Spring

wire inside, LCD Open
and perform Claw A Knob
soldering.
Solder
UL Tape (The tape may have an arbitrary width.)
LCD Sheet LCD Sheet
Guideline for
Attach with reference to the plate attaching UL Tape.
end of the LCD Holder, and fold Conceal the holes
a surplus part. Be sure to cover part.
LCD Sheet
LCD Sheet
Attach with reference to the plate end of
Attach in alignment with the plate the LCD panel, and fold a surplus part
end of the LCD panel (four sheets). (upper, lower).
Fig. 33
36
DISASSEMBLING
1-27 Disassembly of LCD Hinge Unit

(1) Remove one screw (o 1), disengage the claws A and B, and detach the Hinge Top Cover, the Hinge Bottom Cover, and the Magnet.
(2) Detach the LCD-KEY FPC from the LCD Hinge Assy.
(1) When using the service part LCD-KEY FPC, put 1 and 2, 3 and 4, and 5 and 6 on each other in a paired form, and
secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the FPC. Then, fold 7 and 8, and secure them with the Double Sided Tape on the
FPC.
(2) Wind the LCD-KEY FPC 2 and 1/4 turns from the state illustrated below.
(3) Attach the Magnet so that the painted side (black) will be oriented as shown in the figure below.

LCD winding part : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Note on Reassembling (1) Instruction for Supply

Double Sided Tape LCD-KEY FPC
Double Sided Tape
5
7
Double Sided
Tape 6
1 Allowable deviation
3
of attachment from
4 outline: 0.5 mm. Hanal
2 8 FL-778
Fold line Double Sided Tape Folded part

o
9mm Wind 2-1/4 turns

Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Claw A
LCD-KEY FPC
Claw B
(1) - o
(2)
(1)
(1) Hinge Bottom Cover
Hinge Top Cover

LCD Hinge Ass'y
(1)
Magnet
Paint side (Black)
Fig. 34
37
DISASSEMBLING
1-28 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 1

(1) Remove two screws (n 1, p 1), and detach the Grip Belt Plate, the Shaft, and the Grip Belt.
(2) Remove three screws (e 3), and detach the Battery Terminal Assy.
(1) Attach the Battery Terminal Assy as illustrated below.
Grip Belt
(1)
Shaft
Grip Belt Plate
(1)
(1) - p
(1)
(1) - n
(2)
Run the cable Battery Terminal Ass'y

through two hooks.
Battery Terminal Ass'y

(2) - e
e n p
4mm 4.5mm 3.5mm
Metal Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7 M1.7 Black Yellow Red
(self tap) (self tap) (self tap)
Fig. 35
38
DISASSEMBLING
1-29 Disassembly of Rear Cover Unit - 2

(1) Remove three screws (n 2, q 1), and detach the Power Switch Assy.
(2) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the Strap Plate.
(3) Remove one screw (n 1), and detach the Eject Holder, the Spring, and the Eject Knob.
Note : Take care not to lose the Spring.

Entire surface of Spring : Hanal FL-778 (DY9-3026-010)
Instruction for Supply Strap Plate

Spring
Rear Cover
(2)
Hanal FL-778
(2) - n
Power Switch Ass'y
(1) - q
(3)
(1)
(1) - n
(3) - n
Eject Knob
Spring
(1) - n
Eject Holder
n q
4.5mm 5.5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
Fig. 36
39
DISASSEMBLING
1-30 Disassembly of CVF Unit - 1

(1) Detach the UL Tape from the CAV-CVF FPC, and turn up the CVF.
(2) Detach the FPC Holder.
Note : When detaching the FPC Holder, take the following steps.
1. Disengage the claw A.
2. Using tweezers or the like, disengage the claw B from the back side. Detach the FPC Holder while sliding it.
At this step, take care not to damage the flexible cable.
(3) Detach the Dust Cover.
(1) Secure the CAV-CVF FPC with the UL Tape as illustrated below.
(3)
Dust Cover
(1)
CVF Hinge Ass'y

(2)
UL Tape (13 50)
FPC Holder
Claw B
Claw A
Note Note on Reassembling (1)
Claw A
Claw B FPC Holder CAV-CVF FPC UL Tape (13 50)
Fig. 37
40
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the CVF Bottom Cover and the CVF Click Plate.
Note : Disengage the dowel A, and detach the CVF Click Plate while sliding it.
(2) Remove one screw (e 1), and detach the CVF Click Spring.
(3) Detach the CVF Inner part.
Note : Using tweezers or the like, detach the CVF Inner part while pushing it upward as illustrated below.
(2) - e
Note
CVF Click Spring CVF Click Plate
(2)
Dowel A
(1) - k
CVF Inner Part
(3)
(1)
CVF Bottom Cover

Note
Pull out Tweezers
Push UP
e k
4mm 2.5mm
Metal Metal
M1.7 M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 38
41
DISASSEMBLING
(1) When attaching the CVF Bottom Cover, push the CAV-CVF FPC inside as illustrated below.

CVF Click Plate : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Rail part of CVF Top Cover, two points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Inside-wall rail part of CVF Top Cover, four points : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Instruction for Supply

CVF Top Cover's inner wall rail parts
Hanarl KS-39M
CVF Click Plate CVF Top Cover's rail parts

Hanal KS-39M Hanarl KS-39M
CAV-CVF FPC Push in CVF Bottom Cover
Fig. 39
42
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Assy.
(2) Remove two screws (k 2), and detach the CVF Hinge Unit.
(1) Attach the CVF Inner Bottom Cover Assy as illustrated below.
CVF Inner Bottom Cover Ass'y
(2) - k
Claw A
(1)
CVF Top Cover

(2)
k
2.5mm
Metal CVF Hinge Unit
M1.7
Eye Piece
Claw A
First engage the Eye Piece side (claw B)
and engage the claw A.
Running CVF FPC
between the ribs.
CVF FPC
Claw B
Fig. 40
43
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Disengage two claws A, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC, the CVF Mask, and the other parts between them.
(2) Disengage two claws B, and detach the CVF Reflector from the CVF P.C.B.
(3) Disconnect the CN4101 and CN4102, and detach the CAV-CVF FPC and the CVF Assy.
(1) When mounting the CVF Reflector, push the CVF Mask, CVF Assy, Cushion and Diffuser lightly in the arrow direction.
(2) Insert the CVF Assy flexible cable under the rib of the CVF Inner Cover as illustrated below.
CVF Inner Cover
CAV-CVF FPC
Claws A
CVF Mask
CVF Ass'y
(3)
(3) Cushion
CN4102
Diffuser
(2)
CVF Reflector
Claw B
CN4101 CVF P.C.B.
Claw B
CVF Reflector Part

Ribs
Push in
Fig. 41
44
DISASSEMBLING

(1) Remove one screw (r 1), and detach the CVF Knob, Rubber, and CVF Lens Holder.
(2) Disengage two claws A, and detach the Lens1 and Lens2.
(1) When attaching the Lens1 and Lens2 to the CVF Lens Holder, take care not to mistake the orientation of the Lens1/Lens2.
(2) When attaching the CVF Knob, engage the dowel of the CVF Lens Holder as illustrated below. Take care not to forget to attach the
Rubber.

CVF Inner Cover inside, 8 points on sliding rail part : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
Rubber top surface : Hanal KS-39M (DY9-3053-000)
(1) - r
Lens 2
CVF Knob
Lens 1
CVF Lens Holder
(1) Rubber
r
2.3mm
(2) Metal
M1.7
Steped Screw

(1)
Claw A CVF Lens Holder
CVF Inner Cover
CVF Inner Cover Lens 1 Lens 2
Note on Reassembling (2) Instruction for Supply Sliding parts of rail
CVF Knob
Rubber top surface

Rubber
Hanal : KS-39M
CVF Lens Holder Sliding parts of rail
Fig. 42
45
DISASSEMBLING
1-35 Disassembly of Camera Unit

(1) Detach the CCD-CAV FPC from the CN1070.
(2) Remove two screws (f 2), and detach the CCD P.C.B., CCD Assy, Rubber, and IR Filter.
(3) Unsolder the parts A, and detach the CCD Assy from the CCD P.C.B.
(1) When soldering on the CCD P.C.B., secure the CCD Assy and the CCD P.C.B. with two screws (f 2).
Lens Unit
IR Filter
Rubber
CCD Ass'y
CCD P.C.B.
CCD - CAV FPC
CN1070
(1)
(2)
f
(3)
5mm
Metal
M1.7 (1) - f
(self tap)
(3)
Lens
Face thick
side toward
CCD side
Parts A
CCD
IR Filter
CCD P.C.B.
Fig. 43
46
DISASSEMBLING
1-36 Disassembly of Lens Unit

(1) Remove seven screws (n 3, p 2, s 2), and detach the IG Meter Assy.
(2) Unsolder the part (), and detach the PZ Motor and AF Motor.
(1) Run the flexible cable through the groove of part A.
(2) - (1) - p (1) - p
(1) - n
(2) -
(2)
PZ Motor
(2) - AF Motor
(2)
(1) (2) -
(1) - s

IG Meter Ass'y
(1) - n
n p
4.5mm 3.5mm
Metal Metal
A M1.7 M1.7
s
4.5mm
Metal
M1.7
(self tap)
Fig. 44
47
DISASSEMBLING
1-37 List of Screws Used
SYMBOL
SYMBOL
PARTS NO. PARTS NO. ILLUST PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUST
Flat Head Screw

a XA1-3170-507 5mm k XA1-7170-257 M1.7-2.5mm (Metal) 2.5mm
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal)
Steped Screw
b XA1-7170-507 M1.7-5.0mm (Metal) 5mm l DA3-1026-000 4.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)
Steped Screw
c XA1-7170-607 M1.7-5.0mm (Metal) 6mm m XA9-1167-000 3.4mm
M1.7-3.4mm (Metal)
Self Tap
d XA1-7170-307 M1.7-3.0mm (Metal) 3mm n XA4-9170-457 4.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap Self Tap

e XA4-9170-407 4mm o XA4-9170-907 9mm
M1.7-4.0mm (Metal) M1.7-9.0mm (Metal)
Self Tap Self Tap

f XA4-9170-507 5mm p XA4-9170-357 3.5mm
M1.7-5.0mm (Metal) M1.7-3.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap
g XA1-7170-407 M1.7-4.0mm (Metal) 4mm q XA4-9170-557 5.5mm
M1.7-5.5mm (Metal)
Steped Screw
h XA1-7170-357 M1.7-3.5mm (Metal) 3.5mm r XA9-1166-000 2.3mm
M1.7-2.3mm (Metal)
Self Tap
i XA1-7170-557 M1.7-5.5mm (Metal) 5.5mm s XA4-5170-457 4.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm (Metal)
Self Tap
j XA1-7170-207 M1.7-2.0mm (Metal) 2mm t XA4-9170-459 4.5mm
M1.7-4.5mm Black
48
DISASSEMBLING
1-38 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Side Top Side
Front Side Camera / Recorder Unit
Camera Unit Front Cover Unit
49
DISASSEMBLING
Left Cover Unit Right Cover Unit
Rear Cover Unit LCD Unit
50
SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Maintenance Tools ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
2. Setting ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
2-1 Using the Extension Connectors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2
2-2 Setting A ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
2-3 Setting B ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
3. Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
3-1 Outline ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
3-4 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
4. Description of Service Modes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8
4-1 Error Rate --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
4-3 Cleaning Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 12
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
5. Adjustment Procedures ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14
5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 16
5-2 AF Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
5-3 IS Section Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
5-4 Camera Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
5-4-1 Iris Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
5-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
5-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
5-6 CVF Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 26
5-6-1 Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 28
5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 29
5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32
5-7 Color Balance Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 33
5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
5-8-1 SWP Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 34
5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
5-9 Tape Path Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36
1. Maintenance Tools
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks

Alignment T ape, (Color bar master/PAL) DY9-1381-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment T ape (tracking) DY9-1379-000 Running adjustment DMC III
Cassette T orque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC III
DV Cleaning T ape (hard) DY9-1384-000 Head cleaning DMC III
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 T ape path adjustment DMC III
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600 K for 220V DY9-2039-220 Camera electrical adjustment (for 220)
Color Viewer 5600 K for 240V DY9-2039-240 Camera electrical adjustment (for 240)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W1246mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Cassette for changeover to service mode DY9-1386-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment
Extension Flexible cable (24pin) DY9-1390-000 T est pin extended
Extension connector (24 pins) DY9-1395-000 T est pin extended NEW
1
2. Setting
(1) Adjustments other than DMC-III : Perform adjustments in the product state.
(2) Tracking adjustment (DMC-III) and Envelope check : Perform them with the Setting A.
(3) Adjustments related to DMC-III other than Tracking adjustment, tape path system check and tape path system cleaning : Perform
them with the Setting B.
2-1 Using the Extension Connectors
(1) Attach the two extension connectors (DY9-1395-000) to the

extension flexible cable (DY9-1390-000)
Important
Secure the two connectors with tape as shown in
the figure. (When removing the extension con-
nector assembly from the main unit after use, the
connector coupling may be detached in some
cases. If the connector located on the main unit
side comes off, it becomes impossible to remove
it from the main unit. To prevent this, secure the
connectors with tape beforehand.)
(2) Detach the blindfold sheet.
(3) Connect the extension connectors to the CN2900.
<Signals used>
Signal Signal
Pin No. Pin No. BLINDFOLD SHEET
Designation Designation
2 EVF HD 21 EVF R
3 GND 22 EVF COM
15 SWP 23 EVF G Fig. 1
19 PBRF 24 EVF B
DY9-1390-000
DY9-1395-000
DY9-1395-000
Secure with tape.
Fig. 2 Fig. 3
2
2-2 Setting A
Envelope observation)
(1) Observe a PB-RF signal output from each extension connector that has been attached in 2-1 Using the Extension Connectors.
Tracking Adjustment)
(1) Detach the regulation cover.
* : To avoid flawing the regulation cover, detach it from the inside of the left cover as illustrated.
REGULATION
COVER
REGULATION COVER
LEFT COVER
Fig. 4
(2) While observing a PB-RF signal, adjust the post to eliminate

fluctuations of the envelope. ADJUSTMENT DRIVER
Note : When the tracking adjustment is going to be per- (DY9-2053-000)
formed, refer to 5-9 Tape Path Adjustment on
p.36.
Fig. 5
3
2-3 Setting B
(1) Remove the FRONT COVER, REAR COVER, LEFT COVER UNIT, RIGHT COVER UNIT referring to Disassembling.
Note 1 : Referring to Fig.5, connect the required cables.
Note 2 : Observe the signal in the same manner as that for setting A.
Note 3 : For ejection, use the switch concerned on the P.C.B. For mode transition, use the wireless remote controller.
MONITOR TV
JACK2 P.C.B. WIRELESS CONTROLLER

EJECT SWITCH
CA-570
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN51
JACK1 P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B. CN3211
CN3201
FRONT COVER UNIT
REAR COVER UNIT
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. LEFT COVER UNIT

CN101 CN100
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN51
MAIN P.C.B.
CN3201
FRONT COVER
UNIT
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN3211 REAR COVER UNIT
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B.
CN2101 CN101
Fig. 6
4
3. Service Modes
3-1 Outline
(1) The service mode in this equipment uses the wireless remote controller. (To be used in remote control code 2)
(2) For changeover to the service mode, a dedicated tool (CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE: DY9-1386-000) is required in addition to
the wireless remote controller.
(3) Mode changeover is available between the service mode and the normal mode using the Audio dubbing and SLOW keys of the
wireless remote controller.
As long as power is ON, the service mode is available even if the CASSETTE, SERVICE MODE is removed.
(4) In the service mode, changeover of the main unit operation mode can be handled using the keys on the main unit and the remote control
mode 1.
(5) In the service mode, safety functions such as for mechanical error detection, DEW detection and low voltage detection are canceled.
(6) In the service mode, the LCD mirror function is canceled.
3-2 How to Change Over to Service Mode

(1) Set the cassette for changeover to service mode (DY9-1386-
000) in the equipment and load the data.
(2) Press the Dubbing key on the wireless remote controller
that is set at Remote controller code 2.
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press
Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys si-
multaneously for 2 sec.
* The remote controller code setting on the DVC main
unit is operable both at remote controller codes 1
and 2.
DY9-1386-000
(3) Now the changeover to the service mode has been completed
and the SERVICE MODE appears on the screen.
* Pressing the SLOW key performs the changeover Fig. 7
to the normal mode from the service mode.
As long as the power supply is ON, the service mode
is available by setting the Audio dubbing key even
if the cassette for transfer to service mode is re-
moved.
Fig. 8
5
3-3 How to Operate Wireless Remote Controller in Service Mode

(1) To use the wireless remote controller in the service mode, set it at Remote controller code 2.
* To changeover to Remote controller code 2, press the Remote controller setting and Zoom T keys simulta-
neously for 2 sec.
4. SERCH +
3. START/STOP
11. PLAY
5. SEARCH -
8. FF
10. SERCH SELECT
6. FRAME + Remote Controller

9. REW Code 2 setting
12. STOP
7. FRAME -
14. 2
1. DUBBING
2. SLOW
13. PAUSE
Fig. 9
No. Key Designation (in Normal Mode) Key Designation (in Service Mode) Function
1 DUBBING SERVICE MODE Change over to service mode
2 SLOW NORMAL MODE Change over to normal mode
3 START/STOP CS+ Increases CS by 1.
4 SEARCH + FUNCTION + Increases FUNCTION by 1.
5 SEARCH - FUNCTION - Decreases FUNCTION by 1.
6 FRAME + HIGH ADDRESS + Increases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
7 FRAME - HIGH ADDRESS - Decreases HIGH ADDRESS by 1.
8 FF ADDRESS + Increases ADDRESS by 1.
9 REW ADDRESS - Decreases ADDRESS by 1.
10 SEARCH SELECT MODE SELECT Change over to RD/WR mode
11 PLAY DATA + Increases DATA by 1.
12 STOP DATA - Decreases DATA by 1.
13 PAUSE STORE Defines/w rites DATA.
14 2 EJECT Performs EJECT.
6
3-4 Indication in Service Mode

Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
4 18 5 6 8 9
1
3 10
7 11
12
13
14
15
16 17
Fig. 10
1. Indicates that the service mode is currently selected. (SERV)

2. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)
3. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA,MD, CA, CD, etc.)
4. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)
5. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)
6. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)
7. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
8. Indicates the mechanical status. (POPUP, STBY, LOAD1, LOAD2, STOP, PLAY)
9. Indicates the absolute track No.
10. Indicates the mechanical error. (Main power supply backup)
11. Indicates mechanical error history (LITHIUM 3V battery backup)
12. Indicates the version of the MAIN program in the FR MI-COM.
13. Indicates the version of the MODE MI-COM.
14. Indicates the version of the CAMERA program in the FR MI-COM.
15. Indicates the version of the CARD program in the FR MI-COM.
16. E0 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH0 (Low ch) head.
17. E1 : Indicates the error rate of the track that is traced in the CH1 (High ch) head.
18. Data Write status (00: READ mode, 04 : Write preparation, OC : Write execution)
7
4. Description of Service Modes
4-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>

An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-
cated in exponential representation. Low ch. High ch.
EO 2 5 E1
Example) 25 is indicated:
Error rate = 210 -5
-5
2 10
Fig. 11
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>

To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the
table below. Low ch. High ch.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync AO 2 3 A1
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
Example) 23is indicated:

2 3 (hexadecimal)
Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-

nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
( 2 16)+ 3 = 35 (decimal)
Error rate =28H or less
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less) Fig. 12
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
<Change to an AUDIO error rate>

ST EP PROCEDURE MONIT OR Microcomputer operation
CS Function ADDR MODE DT
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 001D ST 00 03 Product setting
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD 03 Audio error rate indication
Remarks) Selecting DT back to "0"makes a return to Audio + Video error rate.
8
4-2 Mechanical Error Indication

<Outline>
(1) On occurrence of a mechanical error, the conditions of the error can be checked in the service mode. (Normal indication mode and
analysis mode available)
(2) In the normal indication mode of the mechanical error, two types of indications appear on the service mode initial screen: the data
indication retained only by the main battery and the error history data indication backed up by LITHIUM 3V.
(3) The data backed up by the LITHIUM 3V can be reset by the STEP-1 operation shown below.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 08 0008 ST 00
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD Completion of backup data resetting
4-2-1 Mechanical Error Normal Mode
Relevant errors are highlighted in purple.
E : TAPE END
B : TAPE TOP
D : DRUM ERROR
C : CAPSTAN ERROR
S : S-REEL ERROR
T : T- REEL ERROR
L : LOADING MTR ERROR
D : DEW ERROR
Fig. 13
9
4-3 Cleaning Mode

When cleaning the head with hard-type cleaning tape (DY9-1384-000), set up the cleaning mode according to the procedure given
below.
Note : After head cleaning, be sure to restore the settings to normal.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 0 10 0111 ST --
2) Increases DT by 2. --
(Change bit-02 to 1 from 0.)
(Example: 80 82)
3) Perform ST ORE. (Press PAUSE key. RD -- Completion of cleaning mode setup
2 1) Change over to the normal mode and turn OFF the power supply. Resetting of cleaning mode
4-4 Commands Particular to Camera

<Outline>
(1) The commands particular to camera are provided for checking the operation.
(2) Make preparation according to the table below and carry out the desired commands particular to camera.
(3) To restore any setting back to the original status, press the PAUSE key (STORE) for each item again in the ST mode.
Turning the power OFF/ON resets all the settings.
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND CS Function ADDR MODE DT
WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3300 ST --
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB is set.
WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3301 ST --
LOCK 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB is locked.
T URBO 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB high-speed setting mode
OUT DOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB outdoor mode
INDOOR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- WB indoor mode
IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3305 ST --
OPEN 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- T he iris is opened forcibly.
IRIS 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3306 ST --
CLOSE 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- T he iris is closed forcibly.
ND ON 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3307 ST --
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- ND inserted
ND OFF 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3308 ST --
2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- ND in standby state
AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 3309 ST --
MAX 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- A value of AGC gain is maximized.
AGC 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330A ST --
MIN 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- A value of AGC gain is minimized.
COLOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330B ST --
BAR 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs color bar from DIGIC DV.
White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330C ST --
100% 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs white 100% from DIGIC DV.
White 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 08 330D ST --
50% 2) Execute ST ORE. (Press PAUSE.) RD -- Outputs white 50% from DIGIC DV.
10
4-5 Checking the Lens Resetting

<Generals>
(1) Set up addresses according to the table shown below. Thus, using data marked with the arrows in the figure below, you can check
whether lens resetting has been completed or not.
* In case of 40 or 44, the zoom lens has not yet been reset.
* In case of 80 or 84, the focus lens has not yet been reset.
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 2 00 8300 RD -- RAM data indication
Fig. 14
11
4-6 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches

<Generals>
(1) The MODE and FR MI-COM terminals can be checked in the service mode. With this function, the key-related operations and the
connections between the keys and the MI-COM terminals can be checked in the product state.
(2) Perform the check in the RD mode.
4-6-1 MODE MI-COM Input Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT

Detection of decrease in lithium
25 Li3V Detect 1 01 0007 3
battery voltage
42 Dial CCW Switch Select Dial 1 01 0005 2
43 Dial CW Switch Select Dial 1 01 0005 1
64 PANEL Open Switch LCD open detection 1 01 0002 6
65 PANEL Bottom/T op Switch LCD reverse detection 1 01 0002 5
66 Eject Switch EJECT SW detection 1 01 0002 4
67 Cassette In Switch Cassette IN SW detection 1 01 0002 3
68 Photo Switch Full pressing of Photo SW 1 01 0002 2
69 Half Photo Switch Halfway pressing of Photo SW 1 01 0002 1
70 ST ART ST OP Start / Stop SW 1 01 0002 0
71 DC J DET DC JACK detection 1 01 0001 7
75 PAE/GREEN SW P.AE/GREEN SW 1 01 0001 3
76 VT R Power Switch POWER SW (VCR) 1 01 0001 2
77 CAM Power Switch POWER SW (CAMERA) 1 01 0001 1
78 T /C PW SW T ape/Card SW 1 01 0001 0
80 DC V DET Input voltage from DC jack 1 01 0000 6
82 KEY AD4 REC PAUSE KEY 1 01 0000 4
4-6-2 MODE MI-COM A/D Port

PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR AD DATA (00FF)
95 KEY AD3 KEY AD 3 1 02 0000 MENU(00) SET (40)
93 KEY AD2 KEY AD 2 1 02 0001 ST OP(00) PLAY(40) FF(85)
92 KEY AD1 KEY AD 1 1 02 0002 DE ON/OFF(00) DE SEL. (40) AE(85)
91 KEY AD0 KEY AD 0 1 02 0003 D.CODE(00) C.MIX(40) REW(85)
88 Batt Info A/D Battery temperature detection 1 02 0006 Low(FF) High(00)
87 Batt A/D Battery voltage detection 1 02 0007 Low(00) High(FF)
12
4-6-3 FR MI-COM Input Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR DATA BIT

P6 SDET S JACK detection 0 01 0000 5
W1 USB DET USB Detect 0 01 0009 5
X5 CARD DET CARD detection 0 01 0009 4
E3 REC PROOF T ape recording inhibition 0 01 000A 7
U6 CARD PRO Card recording inhibited 0 01 000A 2
4-6-4 FR MI-COM A/D Port
PIN NAME Description CS Function ADDR AD DATA (00FF)

AA16 ZOOMKEY Zoom key output 0 02 0002 T ELE WIDE
Intermediate
side side
AC17 T EMP Lens thermometer output 0 02 0003

X15 Y GYRO YAW side GYRO output 0 02 0004
AB16 P GYRO PIT CH side GYRO output 0 02 0005
Y15 I ENC IRIS ENC output 0 02 0006 Small diaphragm Open
AA15 MSW AD Mechanical position 0 02 000A
AC15 DEW DEW detection 0 02 000B
Y14 CAS IN Cassette detection 0 02 000C Cassette Cassette
inserted not inserted
AC14 WIDE DET Wide signal detection 0 02 000D

AA14 T APE T OP Beginning detection 0 02 000E
AB14 T APE END Ending detection 0 02 000F
13
5. Adjustment Procedures
5-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement

After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows minimum
required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any faulty
condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
: Adjustment
required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment item JACK1 MAIN CAV Adjustment setting
Lens CCD CVF
PCB PCB PCB
5-2 AF section
5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment Product condition
5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUT O) Product condition
5-3 IS section
5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment Product condition
5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check Product condition
5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing Product condition
5-4 Camera section
5-4-1 Iris Adjustment Product condition
5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) Product condition
5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment Product condition
5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing Product condition
5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Product condition
5-6 CVF Adjustment
5-6-1 Forced CVF ON Product condition
5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment Product condition
5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment Product condition
5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment Product condition
5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment Product condition
5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment Product condition
5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment Product condition
5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing Product condition
5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON Product condition
5-7 Color Balance Check Product condition
14
Recorder system
Part name
No. Adjustment item MAIN DMC Adjustment setting
PCB III
5-8 Recorder section

5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination Product condition
5-8-1 SWP Adjustment Product condition
5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment Product condition
5-8-3 Automatiac Adjustment of Reel FG Product condition
5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment Product condition
5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing Product condition
DMC III
T ape path
5-9 T ape Path Adjustment
adjustment setting
15
5-1-1 Indication in Service Mode
Shown below are the indications in the service mode.
3 7 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13 6
Fig. 15
1. MODE : Indicates the MODE currently selected. (RD/WR/ST)

2. Indicates for which block the command is specified. (MA, MD, CA, CD, etc.)
3. CS : Indicates the Chip Select currently specified. (0~F)
4. Function : Indicates the Function currently selected. (00~FF)
5. ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS currently selected. (0000~FFFF)
6. DT : Indicate, in hexadecimal representation, the DATA currently being read or set. (00~FF)
7. Data write status (0 : Read mode, 1 : Ready to write, C : Write execution)
8. ST : Adjustment status (02: During adjustment, 05: Adjustment OK, 09: Adjustment NG)
9. ST2 : Adjustment status (for use in AF adjustment)
At the time of IS adjustment

10. IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain
11. IS2 : Pitch Gyro gain
12. IS3 : Yaw Gyro offset
13. IS4 : Pitch Gyro offset
16
5-2 AF Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) The sections 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be executed consecutively. If they are
performed independently, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Also, when section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment is completed, execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) must be
executed immediately without elapse of time. If execute section 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO) is executed after elapse of time
upon completion of section 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment, the sufficient performance cannot be obtained.
Preparation)
(1) For CZ automatic adjustment/cam correction, set the product condition.
(2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Tape/Card : Tape
Program AE : Auto Mode
ZOOM : Telephoto-end
CZ adjustment chart : 2.4 0.02 m from lens front
Chart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
17
5-2-1 CZ Automatic Adjustment
CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained. Execution of STEP 4.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ automatic adjustment in the service mode.
(3) Perform the cam correction.
CZ CS Function MD ADDR DT ST 2
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3100 00
2) Perform storing. RD Move to adjustment mode.
(press the PAUSE button.)
2 2) Perform storing. 2 08 ST 3100 --
(press the PAUSE button.) Automatic adjustment is started. T hen, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately. If any NG
condition is encountered in automatic adjustment,
check the parts inside the lens section.
3 Judgment on result of adjustment 2 08 RD 3100 AA Adjustment is completed (result is OK).
Perform the cam correction.
RD FF Adjustment is completed (result is NG).
T ake the procedure again from the beginning.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 08 ST 0081 -- Preparation for flash memory updating.
2) Perform storing. RD Execution of flash memory updating.
ST2
Fig. 16
18
5-2-2 Cam Correction (AUTO)
CHART CZ adjustment chart

SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.
(2) Perform the cam correction by following the table below.
(3) Quit the service mode, turn power off/on, and then check that proper focusing can be attained in normal zooming operation (AF
OFF).
(4) If the result is NG, perform 5-2-1 : CZ automatic adjustment and 5-2-2 : Cam correction (AUTO).
CAM CORRECT ION CS Function MD ADDR DT ST 2
2) Perform storing. RD 01
2 Cancel the service mode, and set the zoom position to the telephoto end. After focus movement is stopped,
turn OFF the AF function.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 3202 --
WR
2) Perform storing. RD 02 Correction value measurement.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:02.
2) Perform storing. RD 04 Correction value calculation.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:04.
2) Perform storing. RD AA Completion of correction value writing.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST 2:AA.
19
5-3 IS Section Adjustment
Note)
(1) Perform the IS adjustment after machine is re-assembled to a product status.
(2) Prepare a tripod or stable work bench.
(3) Each of the adjustment data (5-3-1, 2) becomes valid when 5-3-3 data writing is made. After completion of each adjustment, be
sure to carry out 5-3-3 before turning power OFF.
5-3-1 Gyro Offset Adjustment
SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
Note)
It will take approx. 25 seconds at maximum to complete adjustment (OK) after storing (pressing the pause button).
GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320D 00
2) Perform storing. RD 05 Adjustment is completed.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
After adjustment, data is indicated at IS3 and IS4.
5-3-2 Gyro Gain Check
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out data checkup.

GYRO OFFSET CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 RD 320D -- Check that IS1 = IS2 = 88.
2) Check data.
IS1 : Yaw Gyro gain

IS2 : Pitch Gyro gain
IS3 : Yaw Gyro offset
IS4 : Pitch Gyro offset
ST
IS1 IS2 IS3 IS4
Fig. 17
20
5-3-3 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-3-1) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 320F 00
2) Perform storing. RD 05 Completion of virtual EEPROM writing.
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :05, NG with ST :09
ST
Fig. 18
21
5-4 Camera Section Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-4-6. If power must be
turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-4-6.
(2) The adjustments from 5-4-2 through 5-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
Tape/Card : Tape
Program AE : Auto Mode
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view
5-4-1 Iris Adjustment
CHART
SPEC. Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris.
IRIS CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
2) Perform storing. WR Adjustment is in progress.
(press the PAUSE button.) RD 05 Adjustment is completed.
Completion with ST :05 (ST :09 NG)
5-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)
CHART Light box (5600K)

Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
WB (1) CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
Note) In this adjustment, color balance gain data is set to FF. Be sure to carry out color balance adjustment de-
scribed in 5-4-3.
22
5-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment
CHART Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart

M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : 2.0 (ratio to burst) 90, Ye : 1.0 (ratio to burst) 180
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
CB (MANUAL) CS Function MD ADDR DT
R GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust relevant data. 2 08 ST 3007 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Adjustment is completed.
Ye GAIN 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 3008 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
Ye PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 3009 "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
R PHASE 1) Make the setting shown at right. ST 300A "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
CHART Light box (5600K), and CCA12 filter

Procedure)
23
CHART Light box (5600K)

Procedure)
5-4-6 Virtual EEPROM and Flash Memory Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, write adjustment data (5-4-1 to 5-4-5) into the virtual EEPROM and flash memory.
EEPROM & FLASH WRIT ING CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with ST :05, ST :09 NG
24
5-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation

Notes)
(1) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for 30 minutes.
(2) In this adjustment, NG is indicated if there are twelve or more pixel defects on the entire screen. (In the case of NG, no compensa-
tion is made.)
(3) The picture element loss correction which is validated by this adjustment is also validated automatically every time power is turned
ON.
5-5-1 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation (AUTO)
Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Digital zoom : OFF
Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
CS Function MD ADDR DT ST
1 CCD void pixel correction
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300E 00
Completion with DT :00 to 0C, NG with DT :8*
2 Virtual EEPROM writing
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 2 08 ST 300F 00
(press the PAUSE button.) Completion with DT :02, NG with DT :03
25
5-6 CVF Adjustment

Notes)
(1) Each adjustment data (5-6-2 to 5-6-7) becomes effective after it is written into the DATA as mentioned in 5-6-8. If power must be
turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the DATA write procedure as mentioned in 5-6-8.
(2) The adjustments from 5-6-2 through 5-6-7 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
(1) Carry out CVF adjustment in the product condition.
(2) For copying black and white master, the service manual CD-ROM and SD card are required.
After formatting the SD card, copy the data to an SD card from the appendix of the service manual CD-ROM.
Destination folder of saving : DCIM/101CANON, File name: IMG0001.jpg
Tape/Card : Card
5-6-1 Forced CVF ON
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
MONIT OR
ST EP PROCEDURE Adjustment points and range
CS Function MD ADDR DT
Forced CVF ON 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1 10 ST 0017 10 Start of setting
2) Perform storing. RD Completion of setting
5-6-2 CVF Frequency Adjustment
M. EQ. Frequency counter

TP. Extension connector - pin 2 (EVF HD)
SPEC. 15.625 0.1kHz
Preparation)
(1) Carry out adjustment according to the table shown below.
MONIT OR
ST EP PROCEDURE Adjustment points and range
CVF Frequency 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0002 "ADJ" Start of setting
Adjustment 2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Completion of setting
26
5-6-3 Contrast Adjustment
MODE Card playback of monochrome master (still picture)

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT
SPEC. 2.20 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
(1) According to the table shown below, carry out adjustment in
the card playback mode of the monochrome master.
2.20V 0.05V
Fig. 19
MONIT OR
ST EP PROCEDURE Microcomputer operation
Contrast Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0003 "ADJ" Start of setting
2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Completion of setting
Contrast Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0004 "ADJ" Start of setting
Contrast Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0005 "ADJ" Start of setting
27
5-6-4 Brightness Adjustment

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (G), pin 21 (R), pin 24 (B), / VIDEO OUT
SPEC. 2.60 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
2.60V 0.05V
Fig. 20
MONIT OR
Brightness Adjustment (G) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 "ADJ" Start of setting
Brightness Adjustment (R) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0007 "ADJ" Start of setting
Brightness Adjustment (B) 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0008 "ADJ" Start of setting
28
5-6-5 Black Limiter Level Adjustment

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 23 (EVF G) / VIDEO OUT
SPEC. 4.45 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
4.45V 0.05V
Fig. 21
MONIT OR
Black Limiter Level 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 RD 0006 Original value Record the original value.
Adjustment 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 00 Setting of 00
2) Perform storing. RD
3) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0009 "ADJ" Start of setting
5) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 0006 Original value Reset to the recorded
original value.
29
5-6-6 COM Amplitude Adjustment

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT
SPEC. 3.50 0.05 [V]
Procedure)
3.50V 0.05V
Fig. 22
MONIT OR
COM Amplitude 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 000B "ADJ" Start of setting
Adjustment 2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Completion of setting
30
5-6-7 COM-DC Level Adjustment

M. EQ. Oscilloscope
TP/TRIG. Extension connector - pin 22 (EVF COM) / VIDEO OUT
SPEC. 3.20 0.05 [V] (DC. P-P center of EVF COM to GND level)
Procedure)
3.20V 0.05V
Fig. 23
MONIT OR
COM-DC Level 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 11 ST 000A "ADJ" Start of setting
Ajustment 2) Perform storing. RD ADJ Completion of setting
31
5-6-8 Flash Memory Writing
SPEC. Automatic Writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (5-6-2 to 7) into the flash memory according the table shown below.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, Flash Memory writing.
MONIT OR
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 4 09 ST 0081 00 Flash Memory Writing
5-6-9 Release of Forced CVF ON
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, make the setting.
MONIT OR
Release of Forced 1) Make the setting shown at right. 1 10 ST 0017 00 Start of setting
CVF ON 2) Perform storing. RD Completion of setting
32
5-7 Color Balance Check

Preparation)
(1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
(2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Digital zoom : OFF
CHART Lightbox (5600K), and color bar chart

M.EQ. Vectorscope
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
SPEC. R : 1.75 98 ( 0.15, 5), Ye : 0.9 175 ( 0.15, 5)
Procedure)
(1) Quit the service mode, and turn power OFF/ON.
(2) Perform light-box recording, and carry out WB SET using the relevant function of the product.
(3) Take an image of the color bar chart, and check that the levels of R, Ye and G are within the specified ranges respectively.
(4) If the result of the above check is NG, carry out camera section adjustment again.
33
5-8 Recorder Section Adjustment

Note)
(1) Each of the adjustment data (5-8-1 to 5-8-3) becomes valid when 5-8-5 flash memory writing is made. When turning power OFF/
ON during each adjustment, be sure to carry out 5-8-5 flash memory writing.
Preparation)
(1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
5-8-0 LCD PCB Setting Destination
When mounting the LCD P.C.B of service part, perform the following adjustment.
2) Add "09" to the current value, and
store the result data. RD ADJ
5-8-1 SWP Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
SWP (AUT O) CS Function MD ADDR DT
2) Perform storing. WR Automatic adjustment is in progress.
(press the PAUSE button.) RD Automatic adjustment is completed.
5-8-2 C. FG Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1381-000)

Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG automatic adjustment referring to the table shown below.
C.FG(AUT O) CS Function MD ADDR DT
34
5-8-3 Automatic Adjustment of Reel FG
MODE Stop without VTR cassette
Procedure)
(1) Carry out reel FG adjustment according to the following table.
5-8-4 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.85 0.02 [V]
Note)
(1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
(2) In step 1 - 2), after completion of storing, "ST" remains indicated or "WR" is indicated momentarily and then "ST" is indicated
again without returning to "RD". Be sure to check in step 2 that the adjustment has been completed.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.85 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
BAT T ERY VOLT AGE DROP. CS Function MD ADDR DT
(press the PAUSE button.) Adjustment is completed.
2 Check if the value of DT is updated on DT 2 during ST ORE.
5-8-5 Flash Memory Writing
SPEC. Memory data writing
Procedure)
(1) Write adjustment data (5-8-1 to 4) into the flash memory according the table shown below.
35
5-9 Tape Path Adjustment

Note)
(1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC III Section.
Preparation)
(1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 2, 3).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below (STEPS 1, 2, 3), play back the tracking master (DY9-1345-000) for tape path adjustment.
At STEP 2, perform tracking shift by adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF so that the RF envelope will be 70%.
(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift setting to normal according to the following table (STEPS 4 : P.OFF).
T RACKING T APE CS Function MD ADDR DT
1 1) Play back the tracking tape.
2 1) Set up tracking shift.
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 0 00 ST 9FE7 F2
3) Perform 70% tracking shift by ST F0~FF T he amount of tracking shift is changed.
adjusting DT in a range of F0 to FF.
* T racking shift released in DT 00.
3 1) Perform tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
4 1) Select the normal mode.
2) T urn off power to the main unit.
36
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach

the transparent chart on a vectorscope display.
Color balance adjustment chart

MVX250i E, MVX200 E,
PAL MV200i E
R-Y
BURST
B-Y
Ye
Color balance check chart

MVX250i E, MVX200 E,
PAL
MV200i E
R-Y
BURST
Ye B-Y
37
SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. Service Hints -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1
1-2 Location of Main Elements ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
1-3 Current Consumption Check ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
2. Trouble Shooting --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
2-1 Power Supply ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
2-2 Camera Picture Faulty ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7
2-4 Startup Window Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
2-5 Short cut demonstration mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
SERVICE HINTS
1. Service Hints
1-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards

The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
OPERATION KEY
CVF P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
R-KEY P.C.B.
JACK1 P.C.B.
CAV P.C.B.
JACK2 P.C.B. LCD P.C.B.
Fig. 1
1
SERVICE HINTS
1-2 Location of Main Elements
MAIN P.C.B.
IC3201
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
FU1810
IC102 IC100
BACKUP MODE MI-COM
FU3205 FU3202
FU3203 FU3201
IC301 IC300
MOTOR DRIVE OPE AMP
IC1810 IC1811 IC3203

CHARGE IC OPE AMP 4.7V REGULATOR
IC2300
FLASH
IC1101
SDRAM
IC2302
SDRAM
IC1102 IC1103 IC2301 IC2000

SDRAM DIGIC DV VIC4 VRP2
Fig. 2
2
SERVICE HINTS
CAV P.C.B.
IC1004 IC1001
2.8V REGULATOR INVERTER
IC1002 IC801 IC1501 IC1200

TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER AUDIO INTERFACE EVF DRIVER LENS DRIVE
LCD P.C.B.
IC4201
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL
IC901 IC902
EEPROM LCD DRIVE
JACK1 P.C.B. CCD P.C.B.
IC1070
CCD
IC1602
SENSOR GYRO
IC1601
SENSOR GYRO
Fig. 3
3
SERVICE HINTS
1-3 Current Consumption Check

The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF OFF), LCD ON (Approx. 0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V
POWER SW MODE Current consumption (A)

CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.43
REC 0.47
VCR STOP 0.29
PLAY 0.37
POWER OFF 0.6 (mA)
4
SERVICE HINTS
2. Trouble Shooting
To detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
2-1 Power Supply

<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Main power is connected. UNREG is supplied to the MAIN P.C.B. MODE MI-COM starts up. MODE MI-COM outputs VCR
ON H signal. PWM driver starts up and turns on each power supply. Establishes communication with the FR MI-COM. FR
MI-COM initializes recorder mechanical chassis. After initialized, the MODE MI-COM is brought into the standby status with the
VCR ON changed to VCR Low.
After that, the power supply is turned ON by the following procedures.
Power supply mode switch operation After MODE MI-COM is accepted, VCR ON H is output. The PWM driver is started to
turn on various power supplies. The FR MI-COM is started to control the system.
<Check Points>
1) Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Powe r Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-
cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3) Error in Mechanism (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P. 9)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters ERROR STOP state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4) VCR O N H, CAM ON H (control signal from MODE MI-COM) Outputs
Check the output of control signal.
5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuity of the fuses FU3201, 3202, 3203, 3205 and 1801 on the MAIN P.C.B. In case of NG, replace the fuse and
check the power consumption.
6) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
5
SERVICE HINTS
2-2 Camera Picture Faulty

<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD CAV P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. (DIGIC DV VIC4) JACK1 / JACK2 P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1) Check of lens reset (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.11)
If no camera picture appears, check if the lens has been reset by means of the service mode. In case of NG, check the lens.
2) Check of blue back output
If the blue back is confirmed, the signal line subsequent to VIC4 is considered to be OK.
3) Check of DIGIC DV generation signal (white 100% or color bar) (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.10)
The white 100% or color bar signals are generated by the DIGIC DV on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, if the output of the
white 100% or color bar signal is attained, the signal line subsequent to DIGIC DV is considered to be OK.
4) Check of CCD output
The CCD output is sampled by IC1002 (TG/CDS/AGC/AD/V-DRIVER). Check the signal.
5) Check by command particular to camera (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P.10)
Check the operation of White balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the service mode.
6
SERVICE HINTS
2-3 Faulty of Playback Picture

<Hints>
In the DV, degradation of picture quality normally appears on the screen as block noise. This is because, if an error occurs exceeding the
ability of the error correction circuit, the block by block information of pictures is not played back properly and thus complemented by
the previous picture information. Normally, such block noise appears on the screen when the error rate has considerably been degraded
due to the degraded tape or the lowered head output, etc. Be sure to check the playback picture quality by the error rate.
<Check Points>
1) Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2) Error Rate (SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT P. 8)
In the service mode, check an error rate of self-recording/LP playback. The specified allowable error rate is 2 10-5.
In case of NG, take the following procedure.
(1) Observe a playback envelope. If it is abnormal, carry out tape-path adjustment.

(2) Run a cleaning tape.
Use the cleaning tape of hard type (DY9-1384-000).
[Playback time]
After replacement of the drum unit 25 seconds
For cleaning 25 seconds per time
* Do not proceed to a playback for 25 seconds or more continuously.
* Limit the total of playback time to five minutes.
* When using hard-type cleaning tape, select the cleaning mode on the product main unit.
(Refer to SERVICE MODE ADJUSTMENT [4-3 - Cleaning Mode] P.10)
(3) Check the error rate again.

If the error rate is out of the specified range, clean the tape drive parts (posts, drum) using cleaning paper moistened with
alcohol.
* Take care not to damage the head.
* Do not touch the head with bare hand.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the tape with a new one and check the error rate again. At this step, use a
tape (must be Panasonic LP tape) which has been purchased at a different time. The error rate may become worse due to
inconsistent quality or aging of the tape.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the drum unit.
If the error rate is out of the specified range, replace the mechanical unit.
7
SERVICE HINTS
2-4 Startup Window Setting

When users original data are written over the initial default data of the start-up image or the sound, shutter, operation or self-timer
[User Setting] , the users original data become a default data (replace the initial default data) after replacement of the MAIN P.C.B.
Note that the data thus written by the user is recognized as a non-original data. To avoid this, follow the next procedure.
Procedure)
How to save an original data to a PC and write it to the main unit:
(1) In the MyCamera window on the Zoom Browser EX, save original image data to a PC.
(2) Replace the MAIN P.C.B.
(3) In the MyCamera window, set the original image data saved at step (1) to the camera.
For details, refer to the DIGITAL VIDEO SOFTWARE INSTRUCTION MANUAL - Customizing Your Camcorder with
the MyCamera Settings.
Note)
Only where the USB I/F is available for connection between the PC and main unit, it is allowed to save/write original data using the
Zoom Browser EX.
8
SERVICE HINTS
2-5 Short cut demonstration mode

As a function destined to shop salesman, the Image stabilizer and white LED can easily be turned ON/OFF. Also, the screen
indicates the version of firmware.
<Operation procedure>
1. Start the operation in the camera mode or card camera mode, and take out the cassette and memory card.
2. Set the Program selector to P .
3. While holding down the Select/Set button, press the MENU button for at least two seconds with the P.AE mode selection screen
(Fig. 4) displayed. Release the MENU button only.
P.AE mode selection screen
Fig. 4
4. Releasing the MENU button displays the short cut demonstration screen (Fig. 5).
Short cut demonstration screen
Fig. 5
5. Operate the Selector dial to change different settings.

Note : The magenta indication items cannot be selected.
ex) IS setting in card camera mode.
6. Press the MENU button or select CLOSE on the screen to exit.
9
PARTS LIST
CONTENTS
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Front Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Left Cover Unit Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Right Cover Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
LCD Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Rear Cover Unit Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Recorder Unit Section-1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Recorder Unit Section-2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
CVF Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
Camera Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
Lens Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Accessory Section-1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
Accessory Section-2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
FUSE Replacement Instruction ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
PARTS LIST --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
CAUTION
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.
2. For continued protection against risk of fire, replace FU3201, FU3202, FU3205 only with same TYPE
: 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE Replace FU3203, FU1810 only with same TYPE : 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE
Manufacturer : Littel FUSE
1
PARTS LIST
Casing Parts Section
14
2 63
3 12
5
4
Left Cover Unit
Rear Cover Unit
10
9
Camera/Lens/CVF/
Recorder Unit
6
63
92 11
9
11
7 113
13
12
11
Front Cover Unit 14 Rigt Cover/LCD Unit

8 15
2
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSARY
3 DA3-1447-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1548-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
4 DF1-5078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, TOP NEW
5 XA1-7170-507 000 F 1 SCREW
6 XA1-7170-357 000 F 7 SCREW
7 D52-0260-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW
8 XA1-7170-557 000 F 1 SCREW
9 XA1-7170-257 000 F 4 SCREW
10 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW
11 XA1-7170-307 000 F 6 SCREW
12 XA4-9170-407 000 F 2 SCREW
13 XA4-9170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
14 XA4-9170-507 000 F 1 SCREW
15 DA3-1439-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LI BATT NEW
3
PARTS LIST
Front Cover Unit Section
10 13
11
9
21
14
8
5
12
*1 113
113
15
6 16
7
4 17
18
19
3 20
2
1
*1 : MVX250i E ONLY
4
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-1526-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 C MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
2 DY1-8651-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK2 NEW
3 DA3-1470-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1531-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
4 DY1-8658-000 000 B 1 RING ASSY, LENS MVX250i E NEW
DY1-8660-000 000 B 1 RING ASSY, LENS MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
5 DY1-8650-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW
DY1-8673-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
6 DA3-1469-000 000 B 1 PLATE, MEGA PIXEL NEW
7 DA3-1456-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
8 DA3-1588-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E NEW
9 DG3-0401-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW
DG3-0418-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
10 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
11 XA4-9170-507 000 F 7 SCREW
12 DA3-1465-000 000 C 1 CHARGE LED NEW
13 DA3-1568-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED LAY CUT NEW
14 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
15 DA3-1460-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MIC NEW
16 DA3-1462-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC NEW
17 DF1-5058-000 000 C 1 MIC ASSY NEW
18 DA3-1461-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW
19 DA3-1463-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC NEW
20 DY1-8682-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, FRONT MVX250i E NEW
DY1-8683-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
21 DA3-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, FRONT NEW
5
PARTS LIST
Left Cover Unit Section
9
12
2 10 12
11
12
13 1
3 6
18
4 17
5
20 14
7 16
21
8 22
19 24 23
15 234
25
6
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7170-307 000 F 6 SCREW
2 DA3-1472-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETE NEW
3 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER
4 DA3-1489-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, SPEAKER NEW
5 DH2-5206-000 000 C 1 FPC, SPEAKER NEW
6 DA3-1485-000 000 B 1 COVER, REGULATION NEW
7 DA3-1593-000 000 C 1 TAPE, GND NEW
8 DA3-1484-000 000 C 1 HOOK, F GRIP NEW
9 DA3-1486-000 000 B 1 COVER, ZOOM TOP NEW
10 DA3-1488-000 000 B 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER NEW
11 DA3-1592-000 000 C 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 NEW
12 DG3-0408-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASSY MVX250i E NEW
DG3-0432-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASSY MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
13 DA3-1471-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
14 DA3-1601-000 000 C 1 TAPE,LB GND NEW
15 DA3-1483-000 000 C 1 LOCK, GRIP PIN NEW
16 DA3-1482-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW
17 DA3-1481-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK NEW
18 DA3-1477-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK NEW
19 DA3-1603-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, L COVER NEW
20 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
21 DF1-5064-000 000 C 1 ARM ASSY, CASSETTE NEW
22 DA3-1574-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LEFT COVER NEW
23 XA4-9170-459 000 F 5 SCREW
24 DA3-1487-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE ARM NEW
25 DA3-1595-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1597-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200i E NEW
DA3-1596-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200 E NEW
7
PARTS LIST
Right Cover Unit Section
4
12 2 1 6
A 8
9
5 10
11
7
A
LCD UNIT
1 13
14 12
8
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA4-9170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
2 DA3-1437-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE NEW
3 DA3-1611-000 000 C 1 LABEL, HOLD NEW
4 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
5 DA3-1440-000 000 C 1 CASE, LITHIUM NEW
6 DG3-0403-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, KEY NEW
7 DA3-1443-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
8 DA3-1445-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CARD COVER NEW
9 DY1-8656-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, RIGHT MVX250i E NEW
DY1-8657-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, RIGHT MVX200i E NEW
DY1-8681-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, RIGHT MVX200 E NEW
10 DA3-1435-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT NEW
11 DA3-1438-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1571-000 000 B 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
12 DA3-1442-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD COVER NEW
13 DA3-1436-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD NEW
14 DA3-1610-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION NEW
9
PARTS LIST
LCD Unit Section
15 16 17
18
14
12
8
13 7
54 6
9
3
10
12
2 11
10
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 XA1-7170-407 000 F 2 SCREW
2 DA3-1508-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1552-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200i E NEW
DA3-1534-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200 E NEW
3 DG3-0400-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, LCD NEW
4 DA3-1503-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
5 DA3-1607-000 000 C 4 SHEET, LCD2 NEW
6 DG3-0404-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASSY, LCD NEW
*1 7 DY1-8670-000 000 B 1 LCD ASSY(SELECTION) NEW
*2 WG2-5272-000 000 B 1 LCD ASSY NEW
8 DA3-1502-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1510-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
9 DA3-1569-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW
10 DA3-1506-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW
11 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK
12 DA3-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX250i E NEW
DA3-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
13 DA2-1737-000 000 1 MAGNET, HINJI
14 DG3-0406-000 000 C 1 HINGE, LCD NEW
15 DH2-5205-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-KEY NEW
16 DA3-1505-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM NEW
17 XA4-9170-907 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
18 DG3-0419-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD DETECT NEW
*1 : Free from the pixel dot.

*2 : Same quality as the production line.
11
PARTS LIST
Rear Cover Unit Section
11
12
3
10
9
8
7 3
5
32
4
133 14
2
12
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-1500-000 000 C 1 BELT, GRIP NEW
2 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
3 XA4-9170-457 000 F 5 SCREW
4 DA3-1490-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW
5 DA3-1499-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW
6 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW
7 DG3-0409-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASSY,POWER NEW
8 DA3-1497-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT NEW
9 DA3-1498-000 000 C 1 SPRING, EJECT NEW
10 DA3-1492-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW
11 DA3-1495-000 000 C 1 PLATE, STRAP NEW
12 DA3-1491-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW
13 XA4-9170-407 000 F 3 SCREW
14 DF1-5059-000 000 C 1 TERMINAL ASSY, BATTERY NEW
13
PARTS LIST
Recorder Unit Section-1
2 3
4
4 *1
CVF Unit
1 *1 A
Camera/Lens/
Recorder Unit
7
6
4
5
*1 : MVX250i E ONLY
7
14
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DH2-5175-000 000 C 1 FPC, ACS-MAIN MVX250i E NEW
2 DG3-0410-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASSY, SHOE MVX250i E NEW
3 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
4 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW
5 DA3-1604-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, RC1 NEW
7 XA1-7170-207 000 F 2 SCREW
15
PARTS LIST
Recorder Unit Section-2
A Camera/Lens Unit
10
24
1
42 5
14
4 13
52
11
6 23
22
A 12
21
20
3
22 93
8
73
23
17
15
18 19
16
16
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
<Caution> 1 DY1-8609-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII
2 XA1-7170-257 000 F 5 SCREW
3 DG3-0402-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK2 NEW
4 DA3-1026-000 000 F 3 SCREW
5 DA3-1429-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, HOLDER NEW
6 DF1-5075-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
7 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
8 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
9 DA3-0941-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
10 DA3-1426-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SUB NEW
11 DA3-1591-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM NEW
12 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, HA
13 DA3-1428-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, PM2 NEW
14 DA3-1609-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CCD CORE NEW
15 DH2-5174-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-JACK2 NEW
17 WE8-6147-000 000 C 1 CORE, FERRITE NEW
18 DH2-5204-000 000 C 1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 NEW
19 DH2-5209-000 000 C 1 CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 NEW
20 DG3-0398-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CAV NEW
21 DH2-5172-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-KEY NEW
23 DY1-8645-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, MAIN MVX250i E NEW
DY1-8648-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, MAIN MVX200i E NEW
DY1-8649-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, MAIN MVX200 E NEW
24 XA1-7170-207 000 F 1 SCREW
<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the
DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10, page 25).
17
PARTS LIST
CVF Unit Section
16
15
14
32
1 13
2
12
11
10
9 17
8
7 18
19
6
5
20
23 21
22
32
24
18
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA3-1517-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
2 DA3-1511-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
3 XA1-7170-257 000 F 4 SCREW
4 DG3-0407-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASSY, CVF NEW
5 DA3-1518-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF CLICK NEW
6 DH2-5203-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-CAV NEW
7 DG3-0405-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CVF NEW
8 DA3-1521-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW
9 DA3-1523-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW
10 DA3-1522-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF PANEL NEW
11 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASSY, CVF
12 DA3-2318-000 000 C 1 MASK, CVF NEW
13 DY1-8678-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, CVF INNER TOP NEW
14 YN1-3090-000 000 C 1 LENS, EYEPIECE 1 NEW
15 DA3-1516-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW
17 DA3-1076-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB
18 DA3-1520-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF NEW
19 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW
20 DY1-8703-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, CVF INNER BOTTOM NEW
21 DA3-1071-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CVF CLICK
22 XA4-9170-407 000 F 1 SCREW
23 DA3-1512-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
24 DA3-1524-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW
19
PARTS LIST
Camera Unit Section
62
4
5
LENS UNIT 3
20
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DH9-3009-000 000 B 1 FILTER, IR NEW
3 DY1-8671-000 000 C 1 CCD ASSY NEW
4 DH2-5176-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-CAV NEW
5 DG3-0399-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CCD NEW
6 XA4-9170-507 000 F 2 SCREW
21
PARTS LIST
Lens Unit Section
1
3
22
42
22
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG3-0715-000 000 C 1 LENS ASSY NEW
2 XA4-9170-457 000 F 3 SCREW NEW
3 XA4-9170-357 000 F 2 SCREW
4 XA4-5170-457 000 F 2 SCREW
5 YH8-2015-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASSY NEW
23
DMC III
PARTS LIST
Mechanical Chassis Section-1
3
1
9
(10) 33 4
6 7
24
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
<Caution> 1 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE
2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
3 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW
4 DY1-8500-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASSY NEW
5 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
6 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASSY
7 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
8 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW
9 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE
10 DA3-2345-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING NEW
<Caution> : When using this part on the product, replace the Housing Cover with the
DA3-2345-000 (Symbol No.10).
25
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1
3 2
1
4
9
5
6 11 10
7
8
12
6
13
26
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER
2 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASSY, S
3 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
4 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASSY, TENSION
5 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASSY, TENSION
6 DA2-2139-000 000 C 2 WASHER
7 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASSY, S
8 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
9 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASSY, T
10 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT
11 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T
12 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
13 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASSY
27
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1 (5)
22
(4) 3
8
(6)
23
9
(14) 22
(7)
11
12
13
2
10
28
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASSY, LOADING
2 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW
3 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASSY
4 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S
5 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T
6 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW
7 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASSY
8 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW
9 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN
10 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
11 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, PINCH
12 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
13 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
14 DA2-2128-000 000 C 1 S LOADING GEAR
29
DMC III
PARTS LIST
1
4
9
5
2
6
11
7
10
30
DMC III
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM
2 XA1-7140-147 000 C 1 SCREW
3 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING
4 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY
5 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT
6 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER
7 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL
8 DA2-2139-000 000 C 1 WASHER
9 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN
10 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN
11 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM
31
PARTS LIST
Accessory Section-1
N.S. (Product available)
CA-570
N.S. (Product available)
CB-2LT
1
CBC-NB2 N.S. (Product available) 2
JPN
A
E
PLUG TYPE B
N.S. AS
(Commercially available.Make copy
sample pictures if necessary.) N.S. (Product available)
NB-2L/NB-2LH/ 4
SDC-8M BP-2L12/BP-2L14 WL-D83(E,P)
(5)
(6)
32
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
2 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E
D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS
3 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L NEW
4 D83-0682-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E) MVX250i E, NEW
MVX200i E
D83-0683-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL) MVX200 E NEW
5 DY1-8528-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
6 DY1-8530-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E) MVX250i E,
MVX200i E
DY1-8674-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL) MVX200 E NEW
33
PARTS LIST
Accessory Section-2
N.S. (Product available) 1
FS-34U WIDE ATTACHMENT WA-34
MVX250i ONLY
N.S. (Product available) N.S. (Product available)

WD-H34 TL-H34
3 3
2 4
IFC-300PCU
N.S. (Product available) SS-900
5
34
PARTS LIST
MECHANICAL PARTS
1 D55-0240-000 000 B 1 WIDE ATTACHMENT MVX250i E NEW
2 DA3-2340-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW
3 DA3-2338-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR NEW
4 DA3-2337-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW
5 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS900
35
PARTS LIST
FUSE Replacement Instruction
CAUTION - FOR CONTINUED PROTECTION AGAINST RISK OF FIRE, REPLACE FU3201, FU3202,
FU3205 ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 0435001 1.0-24V FUSE REPLACE FU3203, FU1810
ONLY WITH SAME TYPE: 043501.5 1.5-24V FUSE MANUFACTURER: LITTELFUSE
MAIN P.C.B.
FU1810
IC3201
IC100 IC301
IC300
IC102
FU3205 FU3202
IC103
FU3203 FU3201
36
PARTS LIST
ELECTRICAL PARTS
MAIN P.C.B
CN2102 VS1-7098-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 21P
FU1810 VD7-2871-501 000 C 1 CHIP FUSE NEW
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN41 WS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC MVX250i E
CN81 WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, MINI AV
CN3212 WS1-6113-000 000 C 1 JACK, DC
CN3551 WS1-6247-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB NEW
JACK2 P.C.B.
CN11 WS1-6347-000 000 C 1 JACK, DV NEW
CN31 WS1-6263-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO NEW
LCD P.C.B.
37
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS QTY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
33 CD1-4054-010 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL NB-2L NEW
3 D52-0260-000 000 B 1 CAP, LENS NEW
35 D55-0240-000 000 B 1 WIDE ATTACHMENT MVX250i E NEW
35 D81-1470-000 000 B 1 STRAP, SHOULDER SS900
33 D82-0643-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(E) PLUG TYPE E
33 D82-0645-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(AS) PLUG TYPE AS
33 D83-0682-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(E)
MVX250i E, MVX200i E NEW
33 D83-0683-000 000 B 1 WL-D83 WIRELESS CONTROLLER(PAL)
MVX200 E NEW
17 DA2-0314-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE
3 DA2-0436-000 000 C 1 SHOE, ACCESSARY
27 DA2-0645-000 000 C 2 WASHER
29 DA2-0780-000 000 C 1 SCREW
11 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK
11 DA2-1737-000 000 1 MAGNET, HINJI
25 DA2-2115-000 000 C 1 SCREW
25 DA2-2116-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (DRUM)
29 DA2-2128-000 000 C 1 S LOADING GEAR
25 DA2-2138-000 000 C 4 SCREW
25,27,29,31 DA2-2139-000 000 C 5 WASHER
31 DA2-2140-000 000 C 1 WASHER
31 DA2-2188-000 000 C 1 GEAR, WHEEL
31 DA2-2190-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CONNECT
31 DA2-2191-000 000 C 1 LEVER, CAM
31 DA2-2192-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, TENSION CAM
31 DA2-2195-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAPSTAN
31 DA2-2196-000 000 C 1 BELT, TIMING
31 DA2-2197-000 000 C 1 GEAR, PULLEY
27 DA2-2220-000 000 C 1 LEVER, EJECT
27 DA2-2238-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, MAIN T
29 DA2-2259-000 000 C 1 SCREW
29 DA2-2261-000 000 C 8 SCREW
17 DA3-0161-000 000 C 1 SHIELD CASE, HA
17 DA3-0941-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
17 DA3-1026-000 000 F 3 SCREW
19 DA3-1071-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CVF CLICK
19 DA3-1076-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, CVF KNOB
17 DA3-1426-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SUB NEW
17 DA3-1429-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, HOLDER NEW
9 DA3-1435-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, ACCESS LED LIGHT NEW
9 DA3-1436-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD NEW
9 DA3-1437-000 000 C 1 COVER, HINGE NEW
9 DA3-1438-000 000 C 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD MVX250i E NEW
3 DA3-1439-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, LI BATT NEW
9 DA3-1440-000 000 C 1 CASE, LITHIUM NEW
9 DA3-1442-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, CARD COVER NEW
9 DA3-1443-000 000 C 1 BASE, TRIPOD NEW
9 DA3-1445-000 000 C 1 HOOK, CARD COVER NEW
3 DA3-1447-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX250i E NEW
5 DA3-1456-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS NEW
5 DA3-1460-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MIC NEW
5 DA3-1461-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, MIC NEW
5 DA3-1462-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC NEW
5 DA3-1463-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC NEW
5 DA3-1465-000 000 C 1 CHARGE LED NEW
5 DA3-1469-000 000 B 1 PLATE, MEGA PIXEL NEW
38
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
5 DA3-1470-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX250i E NEW
7 DA3-1471-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
7 DA3-1472-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETE NEW
7 DA3-1477-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE CLICK NEW
7 DA3-1481-000 000 C 1 SPRING, CASSETTE HOOK NEW
7 DA3-1482-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CASSETTE OPEN NEW
7 DA3-1483-000 000 C 1 LOCK, GRIP PIN NEW
7 DA3-1484-000 000 C 1 HOOK, F GRIP NEW
7 DA3-1485-000 000 B 1 COVER, REGULATION NEW
7 DA3-1486-000 000 B 1 COVER, ZOOM TOP NEW
7 DA3-1487-000 000 C 1 SHEET, CASSETTE ARM NEW
7 DA3-1488-000 000 B 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER NEW
7 DA3-1489-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, SPEAKER NEW
13 DA3-1490-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRIP BELT NEW
13 DA3-1491-000 000 B 1 COVER, REAR NEW
13 DA3-1492-000 000 C 1 KNOB, BATTERY EJECT NEW
13 DA3-1495-000 000 C 1 PLATE, STRAP NEW
13 DA3-1497-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT NEW
13 DA3-1498-000 000 C 1 SPRING, EJECT NEW
13 DA3-1499-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT NEW
13 DA3-1500-000 000 C 1 BELT, GRIP NEW
11 DA3-1502-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX250i E NEW
11 DA3-1503-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LCD NEW
11 DA3-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX250i E NEW
11 DA3-1505-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE BOTTOM NEW
11 DA3-1506-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD OPEN NEW
11 DA3-1510-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
19 DA3-1511-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF TOP NEW
19 DA3-1512-000 000 B 1 COVER, CVF BOTTOM NEW
19 DA3-1516-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF LENS NEW
19 DA3-1517-000 000 B 1 COVER, DUST NEW
19 DA3-1518-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF CLICK NEW
19 DA3-1520-000 000 C 1 KNOB, CVF NEW
19 DA3-1521-000 000 C 1 REFLECTOR, CVF NEW
19 DA3-1522-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CVF PANEL NEW
19 DA3-1523-000 000 C 1 DIFFUSER, CVF NEW
19 DA3-1524-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC NEW
5 DA3-1526-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 MVX250i E NEW
5 DA3-1531-000 000 B 1 PANEL, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
5 DA3-1532-000 000 B 1 COVER, JACK2 C MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
11 DA3-1534-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP MVX200 E NEW
11 DA3-1544-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HINGE TOP MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
3 DA3-1548-000 000 C 1 COVER, ACC SHOE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
5 DA3-1568-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED LAY CUT NEW
11 DA3-1569-000 000 C 1 SPRING, LCD LOCK NEW
9 DA3-1571-000 000 B 1 SHEET, BLINDFOLD BLUE MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
7 DA3-1574-000 000 C 1 SHIELD, LEFT COVER NEW
5 DA3-1588-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, LED W LAY CUT MVX250i E NEW
17 DA3-1591-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, SHIELDING FOAM NEW
7 DA3-1592-000 000 C 1 TAPE, ZOOM TOP COVER2 NEW
7 DA3-1593-000 000 C 1 TAPE, GND NEW
7 DA3-1596-000 000 C 1 LABEL, CAUTION MVX200 E NEW
7 DA3-1601-000 000 C 1 TAPE,LB GND NEW
5 DA3-1602-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, FRONT NEW
7 DA3-1603-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, L COVER NEW
39
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
11 DA3-1607-000 000 C 4 SHEET, LCD2 NEW
17 DA3-1609-000 000 C 1 CUSHION, CCD CORE NEW
9 DA3-1611-000 000 C 1 LABEL, HOLD NEW
19 DA3-2318-000 000 C 1 MASK, CVF NEW
35 DA3-2337-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW
35 DA3-2338-000 000 B 1 CAP, REAR NEW
35 DA3-2340-000 000 B 1 CAP, FRONT NEW
25 DA3-2345-000 000 C 1 COVER, HOUSING NEW
29 DF1-1686-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASSY
29 DF1-1687-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE S
29 DF1-1688-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, GUIDE T
27 DF1-1693-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASSY, TENSION
27 DF1-1694-000 000 C 1 RELEASE ASSY, TENSION
27 DF1-1695-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASSY
25 DF1-1703-000 000 C 1 IDLER ASSY
27 DF1-1704-000 000 C 1 BRAKE ASSY, S
5 DF1-5058-000 000 C 1 MIC ASSY NEW
13 DF1-5059-000 000 C 1 TERMINAL ASSY, BATTERY NEW
7 DF1-5064-000 000 C 1 ARM ASSY, CASSETTE NEW
17 DF1-5075-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER NEW
3 DF1-5078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, TOP NEW
29 DG1-4497-010 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL ASSY
29 DG1-4500-000 000 C 1 ROLLER ASSY, PINCH
31 DG1-4501-000 000 C 1 CHASSIS ASSY, MAIN
29 DG1-4502-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASSY, LOADING
29 DG1-4503-000 000 C 1 MOTOR ASSY, CAPSTAN
27 DG1-4504-000 000 C 1 REEL ASSY, S
27 DG1-4505-000 000 C 1 REEL ASSY, T
25 DG1-4506-000 000 B 1 COMPARTMENT ASSY, CASSETTE
17 DG3-0398-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CAV NEW
21 DG3-0399-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CCD NEW
11 DG3-0400-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, LCD NEW
5 DG3-0401-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW
17 DG3-0402-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK2 NEW
9 DG3-0403-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, KEY NEW
11 DG3-0404-000 000 C 1 BACK LIGHT ASSY, LCD NEW
19 DG3-0405-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, CVF NEW
11 DG3-0406-000 000 C 1 HINGE, LCD NEW
19 DG3-0407-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASSY, CVF NEW
7 DG3-0408-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASSY MVX250i E NEW
13 DG3-0409-000 000 B 1 SWITCH ASSY,POWER NEW
15 DG3-0410-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR ASSY, SHOE MVX250i E NEW
5 DG3-0418-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
11 DG3-0419-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD DETECT NEW
7 DG3-0432-000 000 B 1 ZOOM PHOTO ASSY MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
23 DG3-0715-000 000 C 1 LENS ASSY NEW
17 DH2-5172-000 000 C 1 FPC, MAIN-KEY NEW
15 DH2-5175-000 000 C 1 FPC, ACS-MAIN MVX250i E NEW
21 DH2-5176-000 000 C 1 FPC, CCD-CAV NEW
19 DH2-5203-000 000 C 1 FPC, CVF-CAV NEW
17 DH2-5204-000 000 C 1 FPC, CAV-JACK1 NEW
11 DH2-5205-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-KEY NEW
7 DH2-5206-000 000 C 1 FPC, SPEAKER NEW
17 DH2-5209-000 000 C 1 CABLE, MAIN-JACK1 NEW
21 DH9-3009-000 000 B 1 FILTER, IR NEW
29 DS1-0192-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (PINCH)
40
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
27 DS1-0193-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (TENSION)
27 DS1-0198-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (T BRAKE)
27 DS1-0199-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL (S BRAKE)
25 DY1-8500-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASSY NEW
25 DY1-8501-000 000 B 1 CHASSIS ASSY, SLIDE
33 DY1-8528-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY
33 DY1-8530-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(E)
MVX250i E, MVX200i E
33 DY1-8531-000 000 C 1 DC CABLE
17 DY1-8609-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT, DMCIII
17 DY1-8649-000 000 C 1 PCB ASSY, MAIN MVX200 E NEW
5 DY1-8650-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK1 MVX250i E NEW
5 DY1-8651-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK2 NEW
5 DY1-8658-000 000 B 1 RING ASSY, LENS MVX250i E NEW
5 DY1-8660-000 000 B 1 RING ASSY, LENS MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
*1 11 DY1-8670-000 000 B 1 LCD ASSY(SELECTION) NEW
21 DY1-8671-000 000 C 1 CCD ASSY NEW
5 DY1-8673-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, JACK1 MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
33 DY1-8674-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLER(PAL)
MVX200 E NEW
19 DY1-8678-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, CVF INNER TOP NEW
9 DY1-8681-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, RIGHT MVX200 E NEW
5 DY1-8682-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, FRONT MVX250i E NEW
5 DY1-8683-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, FRONT MVX200i E, MVX200 E NEW
19 DY1-8703-000 000 B 1 COVER ASSY, CVF INNER BOTTOM NEW
VD7-2871-001 000 C 3 CHIP FUSE NEW
VD7-2871-501 000 C 2 CHIP FUSE NEW
VS1-6596-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR 27P
VS1-7098-021 000 C 2 CONNECTOR 21P
19 WG2-5241-000 000 C 1 LCD ASSY, CVF
*2 11 WG2-5272-000 000 B 1 LCD ASSY NEW
7 WR1-5090-000 000 C 1 SPEAKER
WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, MINI AV
WS1-5716-000 000 C 1 JACK, MIC MVX250i E
WS1-6113-000 000 C 1 JACK, DC
WS1-6247-000 000 C 1 JACK, USB NEW
WS1-6263-000 000 C 1 JACK, S-VIDEO NEW
WS1-6347-000 000 C 1 JACK, DV NEW
3 XA1-3170-507 000 F 4 SCREW
25,29,31 XA1-7140-147 000 C 3 SCREW
3,15,17 XA1-7170-207 000 F 4 SCREW
3,15,17,19 XA1-7170-257 000 F 16 SCREW
3,7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 12 SCREW
3,5,7,15 XA1-7170-357 000 F 10 SCREW
11 XA1-7170-407 000 F 2 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-507 000 F 1 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-557 000 F 1 SCREW
23 XA4-5170-457 000 F 2 SCREW
13,23 XA4-9170-357 000 F 3 SCREW
3,5,9,13,19 XA4-9170-407 000 F 8 SCREW
13,23 XA4-9170-457 000 F 8 SCREW NEW
7 XA4-9170-459 000 F 5 SCREW NEW
3,5,9,21 XA4-9170-507 000 F 14 SCREW
13 XA4-9170-557 000 F 1 SCREW
41
PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST
3 XA4-9170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
11 XA4-9170-907 000 F 1 SCREW NEW
19 XA9-1166-000 000 F 1 SCREW
17 XA9-1167-000 000 F 3 SCREW
23 YH8-2015-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASSY NEW
42
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
CAMERA SECTION-3
CAMERA SECTION-4
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
SERVO SECTION
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
LCD P.C.B. SECTION
JACK1,2 SECTION
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E
LENS TEMP SENS CCD P.C.B. SHOE CONNECTOR LCD UNIT
UNIT ZOOM SENS
ZOOM MOTOR LCD

IC1070
CN1070
18 19
19P
2 1
FOCUS MOTOR 22P LCD

FOCUS SENS
12P
23P 22P
IG METER
24P
2 CN4101 22 CVF P.C.B.

1 23
22 CN4102 1
ZOOM PHOTO KEY UNIT

OPERATION KEY UNIT
A1 A60
CN1001
B1 B60
26P
19P 120P 23P
IC1004
19 1 23 1 27P
18 2 22 2 BACK LIGHT
CN1000 CN1501
4P
CN1200
1 2 IC1002
29P IC1001 CAV P.C.B.
MIC UNIT HINGE UNIT
29 28
1 IC1501
8P IC1200
IC801
8
CN701
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN42
8P 2 1
CN41 MIC JACK
8 7
4P IC1602 1 CN43 LCD DETECT FPC

4
1
CN81 AV JACK 5P 4P
25 26
120P 5
26P
IC1601 MAIN P.C.B. IC1810
CN3551 USB JACK
2
1 2
CN3201
2P BATTERY TERMINAL
CN51
1
SPEAKER FPC UNIT
CN3212 DC JACK IC3203
2P 2 IC1811 IC4201
CN3211
1 4P 1
5 CN903
IC3201 5P 4
CN3202
1 1 2
IC1101
12P 26P CN901
LCD P.C.B.
A1 23 24
A12 A1 A60 8
A1 A15 CN2900 CN1100 8P 25 26
CN2101 CN103 B12 B1 B60 CN101 24P
CN102 B1 B15 IC902 CN902
25 26 11 2 1 B1
12 IC2300 1
JACK2 P.C.B. 26P

1 2
IC1102 IC901
1 2 IC2301
20 2 CN891 IC1103
IC100 IC301
21 CN91 1
IC102
21P 1 2 IC2302 IC300
1 2 CN300 KEY P.C.B.

50 51 IC2000 11 1
CN31 CN11 DV JACK 21P
CN2102 2 CN303 20
1 7
1 CN100 10 CN302
CN2000 1 18 1 21
21 20 IC103
27P
S JACK Metal contact (Pins' face down) Metal contact (Pins' face up)
10P 51P 7P 11P 10P 18P 21P 51 50
10P 10 1
CN301 CN100
CN101
1 2 : :
51P
CN102
27 26
1 2
10P 7P 11P 18P 21P
Metal contact Metal contact

LOADING VIDEO DRUM SLIDE MAIN
MOTOR HEAD MOTOR CHASSIS CHASSIS
DMC III ( DIGITAL MECHANICAL CHASSIS II )
SD CARD
01 Mar. 2004 C CANON INC. 2004

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. CAV P.C.B. CAV P.C.B. CAV P.C.B. JACK1 P.C.B. KEY P.C.B.
CN100 CN302 CN1100 CN2101 CN701 CN1001 CN1200 CN42 CN100
1 SP2 + 1 UCOIL A1 ADV/EXT MIC R 1 AV GND 1 EXT L A1 ADV/EXT MIC R 1 ND DRIVE() 1 EXT L 1 MMC RSV
2 SP1 2 UCOIL A2 ADV MIC GND 2 AV L/HP L 2 MIC GND A2 ADV MIC GND 2 ND DRIVE(+) 2 MIC GND 2 MMC CMD
3 GND 3 WCOIL A3 GND 3 AV R 3 ADV/EXT MIC R A3 GND 3 ND HALL IN(+) 3 ADV/EXT MIC R 3 MMC VSS1-1
4 CK 3V 4 WCOIL A4 RAWDATA[0] 4 AV GND 4 EXT P DET A4 RAWDATA[0] 4 ND HALL OUT(+) 4 EXT P DET 4 MMC VDD
5 ZOOM AD 5 VCOIL A5 RAWDATA[1] 5 V I/O/HP R 5 INT MIC GND A5 RAWDATA[1] 5 ND HALL IN() 5 INT MIC GND 5 MMC SCK
6 PICT SW 6 VCOIL A6 RAWDATA[2] 6 AV GND 6 INT MIC R A6 RAWDATA[2] 6 ND HALL OUT() 6 INT MIC R 6 MMC VSS1-2
7 KEY LED0 7 CH A7 RAWDATA[3] 7 AV DET 7 INT MIC GND A7 RAWDATA[3] 7 GND 7 INT MIC GND 7 MMC DAT
8 P5V 8 W A8 GND 8 CAM LED 8 INT MIC L A8 GND 8 ZOOM B 8 INT MIC L 8 MMC DAT1
9 HALF PHOTO SW 9 W+ A9 RAWDATA[4] 9 AVDD2.7V CN1000 A9 RAWDATA[4] 9 ZOOMB CN43 9 MMC DAT2
10 PHOTO SW 10 C H + A10 RAWDATA[5] 10 Y GY OUT 1 N.C A10 RAWDATA[5] 10 ZOOMA 1 INT MIC GND 10 CARD PRO
CN101 11 U + A11 RAWDATA[6] 11 GY GND 2 CCD OUT A11 RAWDATA[6] 11 ZOOM A 2 INT MIC R 11 GND
1 NET PW SW 12 U A12 RAWDATA[7] 12 P GY OUT 3 GND A12 RAWDATA[7] 12 FOCUSA 3 INT MIC GND 12 CARD DET
2 VTR PW SW 13 V + A13 GND 13 GND 4 VL(7.5V) A13 GND 13 FOCUS A 4 INT MIC L 13 M GND
3 CAM PW SW 14 V A14 RAWDATA[8] 14 GND 5 CAM3V A14 RAWDATA[8] 14 FOCUS B CN51 CN101
4 START/STOP SW 15 CFG2 A15 RAWDATA[9] 15 D + 6 SUB SW A15 RAWDATA[9] 15 FOCUSB 1 VTR UNREG 1 MO GND
5 GND 16 CFG GND A16 RAWDATA[10] 16 N.C 7 V1 A16 RAWDATA[10] 16 TEMP 2 CHAGE LED 2 MO GND
6 TAPE/CARD SW 17 CFG VCC A17 RAWDATA[11] 17 D 8 V2 A17 RAWDATA[11] 17 TEMP 2.7V 3 RMC IN 3 MO GND
7 GRN/P.AE 18 CFG1 A18 GND 18 GND 9 V3 A18 GND 18 FOCUS VCC 4 DC J SW 4 VTR UNREG
8 N.C CN303 A19 DSP CLK 19 GND 10 V4 A19 DSP CLK 19 FOCUS LED 5 GND 5 VTR UNREG
CN102 1 BOT E A20 GND 20 VBUS 11 VSUB A20 GND 20 FOCUS SENS 6 P5V 6 VTR UNREG
1 GND 2 BOT C A21 XTGHD 21 P5V 12 GND A21 XTGHD 21 ZOOM SENS 7 VBUS 7 LCD BL ON
2 CARD DAT3 3 MIC GND A22 XTGVD 22 GND 13 RESET A22 XTGVD 22 ZOOM VCC 8 GND 8 LCD ON
3 CARD CMD 4 MIC3 A23 VGATE 23 DC J SW 14 GND A23 VGATE 23 ZOOM LED 9 GND 9 LCD EEP SIN1
4 GND 5 REC PRF A24 F RES SW 24 RMC IN 15 H1 A24 F RES SW 24 IG DRIVE() 10 D 10 LCD EEP SCK
5 CARD SCK 6 MIC2 A25 Z RES SW 25 CHAGE LED 16 GND A25 Z RES SW 25 IG DRIVE(+) 11 N.C 11 LCD EEP SOUT
6 CARD VSS1 7 MIC1 A26 MO GND 26 VTR UNREG 17 H2 A26 MO GND 26 IG HALL IN(+) 12 D + 12 LCD EEP CS
7 GND 8 TIN A27 MO GND CN2102 18 GND A27 MO GND 27 IG HALL OUT(+) 13 GND 13 LCD CS
8 CARD DAT2 9 TOUT A28 CAM3V 1 YC GND 19 VH(+15V) A28 CAM3V 28 IG HALL IN() 14 GND 14 LCD8.5V
9 CARD DAT 10 TIN + A29 CAM3V 2 C I/O A29 CAM3V 29 IG HALL OUT() 15 P GY OUT 15 LCD5V
10 GND 11 TOUT + A30 CCD15V 3 YC GND A30 CCD15V CN1501 16 GY GND 16 LCD2.7V
11 CARD DAT1 12 C IN A31 CCD7V 4 YC GND A31 CCD7V 1 VSS 17 Y GY OUT 17 LCD2.7V
12 GND 13 CIN GND A32 GND 5 YC GND A32 GND 2 XSTH 18 AVDD2.7V 18 C SYNC
13 GND 14 LED A A33 GND 6 Y I/O A33 GND 3 STH 19 CAM LED 19 GND
14 DVDD2.7V 15 LED K A34 GND 7 S DET A34 GND 4 CKH1 20 AV DET 20 GND
15 CARD DET 16 SIN A35 GND 8 YC GND A35 A CLK GND 5 CKH2 21 AV GND 21 PANEL B
16 CARD PAO 17 SOUT A36 AMCK 9 YC GND A36 AMCK 6 VDD 22 V I/O/HP R 22 PANEL G
17 DVDD3V 18 SIN + A37 WCK 10 EJECT SW A37 WCK 7 G 23 AV GND 23 PANEL R
18 N.C 19 SOUT + A38 AIF SO 11 DIAL CW A38 AIF SO 8 R 24 AV R 24 PNL B/T SW
19 KEY AD0 20 EOT E A39 AIF CS 12 DIAL CCW A39 AIF CS 9 B 25 AV L/HP L 25 PNL OP SW
20 KEY AD1 21 EOT C A40 AIF SCLK 13 KEY AD3 A40 AIF SCLK 10 BL2.7V 26 AV GND 26 GND
21 KEY AD2 CN891 A41 XPDI 14 GND A41 XPDI 11 DSG CN3211 27 CARD ACCESS LED
22 KEY AD4 1 SHOE UNREG A42 REC MUTE 15 GND A42 REC MUTE 12 XDSG 1 DC + 28 LI 3V
23 LI 3V 2 SHOE UNREG A43 A MUTE 16 TPA A43 A MUTE 13 DSD 2 DC 29 KEY AD4
24 CARD ACCESS LED 3 POW GND A44 EXT DET 17 XTPA A44 EXT DET 14 VBB 30 KEY AD2
25 GND 4 POW GND A45 HP MUTE 18 XTPB A45 HP MUTE 15 ENB 31 KEY AD1
26 PNL OP SW 5 POW GND A46 SOUND 19 TPB A46 SOUND 16 XENB 32 KEY AD0
27 PNL B/T SW 6 ID-1 A47 HP ON 20 GND A47 HP ON 17 XSTV JACK2 P.C.B. 33 N.C
28 PANEL R 7 ST VDHGL A48 SP + 21 N.C A48 SP + 18 STV CN91 34 DVDD3V
29 PANEL G 8 ST STSP A49 SP CN2900 A49 SP 19 CKV2 1 GND 35 CARD PRO
30 PANEL B 9 ID-2 A50 SP GND A1 V I/O A50 SP GND 20 CKV1 2 TPB 36 CARD DET
31 GND 10 ADV MIC GND A51 SP GND A2 GND A51 SP GND 21 COM 3 XTPB 37 DVDD2.7V
32 GND 11 ADV MIC L A52 AA4.7V A3 VTR POW SW A52 AA4.7V 22 P5V 4 XTPA 38 GND
33 C SYNC 12 ADV/EXT MIC R A53 AA4.7V A4 N.C A53 AA4.7V 23 P5V 5 TPA 39 GND
34 LCD2.7V A54 AA2.7V A5 CAM POW SW A54 AA2.7V 6 GND 40 CARD DAT1
35 LCD2.7V A55 AA2.7V A6 FCH O A55 AA2.7V 7 GND 41 GND
36 LCD5V A56 AA GND A7 TCK A56 AA GND 8 KEY AD3 42 CARD DAT
37 LCD8.5V A57 AA GND A8 SWP A57 AA GND LCD P.C.B. 9 DIAL CCW 43 CARD DAT2
38 LCD CS A58 V I/O/HP R A9 GND A58 V I/O/HP R CN901 10 DIAL CW 44 GND
39 LCD EEP CS A59 AV L/HP L A10 PBRF A59 AV L/HP L 1 MO GND 11 EJECT SW 45 CARD VSS1
40 LCD EEP SOUT A60 AV R A11 EVF R A60 AV R 2 MO GND 12 YC GND 46 CARD SCK
41 LCD EEP SCK B1 ADV MIC L A12 EVF G B1 ADV MIC L 3 MO GND 13 YC GND 47 GND
42 LCD EEP SIN1 B2 ADV MIC GND B1 EVF HD B2 ADV MIC GND 4 VTR UNREG 14 S DET 48 CARD CMD
43 LCD ON B3 PWM IRIS B2 MODE RESET B3 PWM IRIS 5 VTR UNREG 15 Y I/O 49 CARD DAT3
44 LCD BL ON B4 PWM ND B3 VTR ON IC3201 B4 PWM ND 6 VTR UNREG 16 YC GND 50 GND
45 VTR UNREG B5 PWM FA B4 VTR UNREG B5 PWM FA 7 LCD BL ON 17 YC GND 51 GND
46 VTR UNREG B6 PWM FB B5 MIC2 B6 PWM FB 8 LCD ON 18 YC GND CN102
47 VTR UNREG B7 PWM ZA B6 MIC3 B7 PWM ZA 9 LCD EEP SIN1 19 C I/O 1 PNL B/T SW
48 MO GND B8 PWM ZB B7 TRST B8 PWM ZB 10 LCD EEP SCK 20 YC GND 2 GND
49 MO GND B9 DA LOAD B8 TMS B9 DA LOAD 11 LCD EEP SOUT 21 N.C 3 PANEL R
50 MO GND B10 CAM SCK B9 TDI B10 CAM SCK 12 LCD EEP CS 4 PANEL G
51 MO GND B11 CAM SO B10 TDO B11 CAM SO 13 LCD CS 5 PANEL B
CN103 B12 AFE CS B11 EVF COM B12 AFE CS 14 LCD8.5V 6 GND
A1 MODE RESET B13 F PSB B12 EVF B B13 F PSB 15 LCD5V CVF P.C.B. 7 GND
A2 EPM B14 Z PSB CN3201 B14 Z PSB 16 LCD2.7V CN4101 8 GND
A3 CE B15 IRIS PSB 1 DC B15 IRIS PSB 17 LCD2.7V 1 P5V 9 C SYNC
A4 CNVSS B16 IRIS CL 2 DC + B16 IRIS CL 18 C SYNC 2 COM 10 LCD3V
A5 N.C B17 ND PSB CN3202 B17 ND PSB 19 GND 3 CKV1 11 LCD3V
A6 DEBCLK B18 DA CFG 1 BATT B18 DA CFG 20 GND 4 CKV2 12 LCD5V
A7 GND B19 SUB CONT 2 BATT B19 SUB CONT 21 GND 5 STV 13 LCD8.5V
A8 DEBUD B20 AFE RST 3 BATT INFO AD B20 AFE RST 22 PANEL B 6 XSTV 14 LCD CS
A9 GND B21 I ENC 4 BATT + B21 I ENC 23 PANEL G 7 XENB 15 LCD EEP CS
A10 DEBDD B22 GND 5 BATT + B22 GND 24 PANEL R 8 ENB 16 LCD EEP SOUT
A11 GND B23 ND ENC B23 ND ENC 25 GND SW 9 VBB 17 LCD EEP SCK
A12 XDEBEN B24 LED RET B24 LED RET 26 PANEL BT SW 10 DSD 18 LCD EEP SIN1
A13 GND B25 TEMP B25 TEMP 27 PANEL BT SW 11 XDSG 19 LCD ON
A14 GND B26 P GYRO B26 P GYRO CN902 12 DSG 20 LCD BL ON
A15 E3V+LI3V B27 Y GYRO B27 Y GYRO 1 TEST 13 BL2.7V 21 VTR UNREG
B1 GND B28 I SW B28 I SW 2 RGT 14 B 22 VTR UNREG
B2 FLASH CLK B29 P GY OUT B29 P GY OUT 3 BLUE 15 R 23 VTR UNREG
B3 FLASH RST B30 AVDD2.7V B30 AVDD2.7V 4 RED 16 G 24 MO GND
B4 FLASH RXD1 B31 Y GY OUT B31 Y GY OUT 5 GREEN 17 VDD 25 MO GND
B5 FLASH TXD1 B32 DVDD2.7V B32 DVDD2.7V 6 PSIG 18 CKH2 26 MO GND
B6 N.C B33 P5V B33 P5V 7 HCK1 19 CKH1 27 MO GND
B7 DVDD3V B34 P5V B34 P5V 8 HCK2 20 STH
B8 CG CS B35 AUD2 I B35 AUD2 I 9 WIDE 21 XSTH
B9 EEP/CG CLK B36 MACS1 I B36 MACS1 I 10 TEST 22 VSS
B10 EEP/CG SO B37 LRCK B37 LRCK 11 REF 23 VSS CCD P.C.B.
B11 DOT CLK B38 C SYNC B38 C SYNC 12 HST CN4102 CN1070
B12 OSD I0 B39 EVF COM B39 EVF COM 13 PCG 1 COM 1 N.C
B13 OSD I1 B40 GND B40 GND 14 XSTBY 2 CKV1 2 VH(+15V)
B14 VIC HD B41 GND B41 GND 15 VSSG 3 CKV2 3 GND
B15 VIC VD B42 EVF R B42 EVF R 16 N.C 4 STV 4 H2
CN300 B43 EVF G B43 EVF G 17 VSS 5 XSTV 5 GND
1 U B44 EVF B B44 EVF B 18 VDD 6 XENB 6 H1
2 U B45 GND B45 GND 19 DWN 7 ENB 7 GND
3 V B46 EVF 3V ON B46 EVF 3V ON 20 EN 8 CSV 8 RESET
4 V B47 EVF 8.5V ON B47 EVF 8.5V ON 21 VCK 9 VBB 9 GND
5 DFG B48 VF B EVF B48 VF B EVF 22 VST 10 DSD 10 VSUB
6 DPG B49 VF G EVF B49 VF G EVF 23 CS 11 XDSG 11 V4
7 SENS COM B50 VF R EVF B50 VF R EVF 24 COM 12 DSG 12 V3
8 SENS GARD B51 GND B51 GND CN903 13 B 13 V2
9 COIL COM B52 EVF HD B52 EVF HD 1 PANEL BT SW 14 R 14 V1
10 W B53 EVF SEN B53 EVF SEN 2 GND SW 15 G 15 SUB SW
11 W B54 EVF EEP CS B54 EVF EEP CS 3 LCD2.7V 16 CSH 16 CAM3V
CN301 B55 LCD EEP SCK B55 LCD EEP SCK 4 N.C 17 VDD 17 VL(7.5V)
1 LOAD(+) B56 LCD EEP SIN1 B56 LCD EEP SIN1 18 CKH2 18 GND
2 LOAD(+) B57 LCD EEP SOUT B57 LCD EEP SOUT 19 CKH1 19 CCD OUT
3 MSW VSS B58 LCD8.5V B58 LCD8.5V 20 VSS
4 MSW VCC B59 LCD2.7V B59 LCD2.7V 21 STH
5 MSW SENS B60 LCD2.7V B60 LCD2.7V 22 XSTH
6 LOAD() CN2000
7 LOAD() 1 HA GND
8 DEW + 2 H1A
9 DEW 3 H1B
10 N.C 4 HA GND
5 H2A
6 H2B
7 HA GND
CAMERA SECTION-1 MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
CCD P.C.B. CAV P.C.B. (1/2)
SUB CONT
2 4 J2 CLI HD D2 XTGHD
VD D1 XTGVD
IC1001 DCLK2/FD C1 DSP CLK
H2 12 SN74LVC/GU04DCK3 SYNC/VGATE C9 VGATE

INVERTER
H1 11 OUT CONT D9 AFE RST
RG 10 SCK J10 CAM SCK

3 1
SUB 13 IC1002 SL K10 AFE CS
AD9929BBCZ
V4 1 SDATA K9 CAM SO
X1001 TG/CDS
V3 2 /AGC/AD D11 A2 RAWDATA (11)
V2 3
CN1070 CN1000 /V-DRIVER B2 RAWDATA (10)
CAM 3V CAM 3V 16 2 CCD OUT K5 CCD IN
V1 4 H2 4 4 VL(7.5V) CCD7V A3 RAWDATA (9)
H1 6 5 CAM3V CAM3V
B3 RAWDATA (8)
RESET 8 6 SUB SW
IC1070 VSUB 10 7 V1 H9 V4 A4 RAWDATA (7)
ICX475AK-K V4 11 8 V2
G10 V3 B5 RAWDATA (6)
CCD V3 12 9 V3
V2 13 10 V4 E9 V2 B6 RAWDATA (5)
Q1074
V1 14 11 VSUB
D10 V1 A6 RAWDATA (4)
RC 6 SUB SW 15 13 RESET
CCD OUT 19 15 H1 VSUB G9 SUBCK B7 RAWDATA (3)
Q1071
Q1073 VL (7.5) 17 17 H2
RESET H1 RG A7 RAWDATA (2)
VH(+15V) 2 19 VH(+15V) CCD15V
VOUT 8
G1 H1 A8 RAWDATA (1)
F1 H2 D0 B8 RAWDATA(0)
IC1004
MM1612JM
2.8V REGULATOR
VL 14
2.8V 4 V OUT V IN 5 CAM3V
VDD 7
CN701
TO ADV MIC L
1 EXT L
JACK 1,2
SECTION 3 ADV/EXT MIC R
EXT DET
JACK1 P.C.B. 5 INT MIC R
CN42
8 INT MIC L Q807 ADV/EXT MIC R
CAM SCK TO
CAM SO CAMERA SECTION-2
Q821 CAV P.C.B.
A MUTE
CN1001
DSP CLK A19 TO
Q822,Q823 XTGHD A21 CAMERA SECTION-4
MAIN P.C.B.
MUTE XTGVD A22 CN1100
DL VGATE A23
AFE CS B12
SUB CONT B19
Q823 AFE RST B20
POWER RAWDATA(0) A4
AA4.7V P5V AA2.7V AA4.7V
ON MUTE RAWDATA(1) A5
RAWDATA(2) A6
RAWDATA(3) A7
RAWDATA(4) A9
32 19 47 34 41 40
RAWDATA(5) A10
45 RAWDATA(6) A11
RAWDATA(7) A12
42
RAWDATA(8) A14
LRCK MIC PRE AMP RAWDATA(9) A15
3 POWER
RAWDATA(10) A16
28
AMCK RAWDATA(11) A17
4
HPF 26 AV L/HP L A59
WCK AUDIO FIL1 +2db 24db OVF OFFSET OFFSET AV R A60
5 I/F ALC1 FIL2 to +12db DETECT CANCEL CANCEL ADC 44 Q803 Q805 TO
CONTROLLER EQ 2db 0db HPF HPF ADV/EXT MIC R A1
FIL3 SYSTEM
AUD2 I 39 CA-3 A43 CONTROL
6
EXT DET A44 SECTION
PRE AMP MAIN P.C.B.
MACS1 I HP MUTE A45
7 CN1100
27 AV-1 A47
V I/O/HP R A58
25
ADV MIC L B1
MIXER
& DAC OPGA MIX 36 V I/O/HP R SOUND A46
Q804
DEM AMCK A36
WCK A37
Q806
IC801 AIF SO A38
AK4567 31
AIF CS A39
HP AMP
AUDIO INTERFACE Q801
Q825
AIF SCLK A40
LINE OUT 29 XPDI A41
HP MUTE REC MUTE A42 TO
CONTROL 35 AUDIO-VIDEO
AIF SO SP+ A48 SECTION-1
12 REGISTER SP+
I/F 21 SP A49 MAIN P.C.B.
Q802 Q824 CN1100
SPK AMP HP ON LRCK B37
ALC2
SP AUD2 I B35
20
MACS/I B36
CAM3V A28
13 14 16 17 23 24 2
CAM3V CAM3V A29
AIF CS
AIF SCLK
REC MUTE
XPDI
CCD15V CCD15V A30

CCD7V CCD7V A31
AA4.7V A52
AA4.7V AA4.7V A53
AA2.7V A54
AA2.7V AA2.7V A55
P5V B33
P5V P5V B34

CAMERA SECTION-2 MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
CAV P.C.B.(2/2)
ND HALL OUT ()
37 HALL1OUT VDD 12 CAM 3V
ND HALL OUT (+)
36 HALL1+OUT
ND HALL IN (+)
35 HALL1+IN
ND HALL IN () PWM ND
33 HALL1IN IN 6 54
ND DRIVE (+) HD PSB
56 OUT 6 EN 6 55
CN1200 ND DRIVE () DA CFG
TO 58 OUT 6B DAC 3 OUT 53
LENS UNIT 6 ND HALL OUT () ND ENC
AELEV 1 38
5 ND HALL IN ()
PWM IRIS
4 ND HALL OUT (+) IG FOCUS A IN 1 63
26 OUT 2
3 ND HALL IN (+) PWM FA
IG FOCUS B IN 2 13
2 ND DRIVE (+) 20 OUT 3
PWM FB
1 ND DRIVE () IG FOCUS B IN 3 17
22 OUT 3B
13 FOCUS A PWM ZA
IG FOCUS A IN 4 15
14 FOCUS B 24 OUT 2B
PWM ZB
15 FOCUS B IG ZOOM B IN 5 2
7 OUT 5B
12 FOCUS A Z PSB
IG ZOOM B EN 4 5 16
9 ZOOM B 6 OUT 5
8 ZOOM B IG ZOOM A EN 3 18
9 OUT 4B
10 ZOOM A F PSB
IG ZOOM A EN 2 14
11 ZOOM A 10 OUT 4 CAM SO TO
25 IG DRIVE (+) CAM SCK CAMERA SECTION-1
CAV P.C.B.
24 IG DRIVE () IC1200
26 IG HALL IN (+) BH9921KS2
27 IG HALL OUT (+) LENS DRIVE
28 IG HALL IN () CN1001
IG DRIVE (+)
29 IG HALL OUT () 62 OUT1 DA LOAD ND ENC B23 TO
LD 5 CAMERA SECTION-4
18 FOCUS VCC AVDD 2.7V IG DRIVE () ND PSB B17
60 OUT1B IRIS CL MAIN P.C.B.
21 ZOOM SENS IRIS CONT 64 PWM ND B4 CN1100
IG HALL IN (+)
16 TEMP 28 HALL2+IN IRIS PSB PWM FA B5
EN1 1
20 FOCUS SENS IG HALL OUT (+) PWM FB B6
29 HALL2+OUT I SW
23 ZOOM LED GAIN1 2 51 PWM ZA B7
IG HALL IN ()
19 FOCUS LED 27 HALL2IN Y GY OUT PWM ZB B8
GYRIN1 40
IG HALL OUT () Z PSB B14
30 HALL2OUT P GY OUT
GYRIN2 45 F PSB B13
Q1200 P GYRO PMW IRIS B3
GYRLEV2 48
DA CFG B18 TO
Y GYRO AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-4
P5V 8 VM4.5 GYRLEV1 42 Y GY OUT B29
MAIN P.C.B.
I ENC P GY OUT B31 CN1100
21 VM3 AELEV2 31
DA LOAD B9
CAM SO
25 VM2 DI 3 IRIS CL B16
CAM SCK IRIS PSB B15
61 VM1 CLK 4
I SW B28
P GYRO B26
DVDD2.7V 19 VDD Y GYRO B27
I ENC B21
AVDD2.7V 32 VC1
CAM SO B11
46 VC2 CAM SCK B10
Z RES SW A25
TEMP B25
CVF P.C.B. F RES SW

LED RET
A24
B24
VF B EVF B48
VF G EVF B49
BACK
LIGHT VF R EVF B50
Q4101 CSYNC B38
CN4101 CN1501 EVF HD B52
XSTH
P5V 1 2 XSTH 17 XSTH EVF COM B39
CN4102 BL2.7V 13 3 STH STH EVF HD EVF G B43
LCD 18 STH HD 15
1 COM COM 2 4 CKH1 EVF R B42
(CVF) CKH1 C SYNC
2 CKV1 CKV1 3 5 CKH2 20 CKH 1 HDIN 60 EVF B B44
3 CKV2 CKV2 4 7 G CKH2 VF B EVF LCD EEP SCK B55
19 CKH 2 BIN 55
4 STV STV 5 8 R LCD EEP SOUT B57
G VF G EVF
5 XSTV XSTV 6 9 B 43 GOUT GIN 54 EVF SEN B53
6 XENB XENB 7 11 DSG R VF R EVF EVF 3V ON B46
45 ROUT RIN 53
7 ENB ENB 8 12 XDSG EVF 8.5V ON B47
B
10 DSD DSD 10 15 ENB 40 BOUT EVF EEP CS B54
11 XDSG XDSG 11 16 XENB DSG LCD EEP SIN 1 B56 TO
24 DSG SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
12 DSG DSG 12 17 XSTV AVDD 2.7V AVDD 2.7V B30
XDSG MAIN P.C.B.
13 B B 14 18 STV 23 XDSG Q1510 DVDD 2.7V DVDD 2.7V B32 CN1100
14 R R 15 19 CKV2 ENB
30 ENB
IC1501 LCD 8.5V LCD 8.5V B58
15 G G 16 20 CKV1
XENB
LV4141W LCD EEP SCK Q1507 LCD 2.7V B59
17 VDD VDD 17 21 COM 29 XENB EVF DRIVER SCLK 8 LCD 2.7V B60
18 CKH2 CKH2 18 13 DSD XSTV LCD EEP SOUT
25 XSTV DATA 7
19 CKH1 CKH1 19 6 VDD A8.5V LCD 2.7V
STV EVF SEN
21 STH STH 20 10 BL2.7V 26 STV LOAD 6 Q1506
22 XSTH XSTH 21 22 P5V CKV2
Q1508 27 CKV2
23 P5V
CKV1
28 CKV1 VCC 1 49 EVF A2.7V
P5V
COM
38 COMOUT SYNC IN 57
DSD
50 DSDOUT VDD 1 1
39 VCCCOM VDD 2 11
A8.5V 47 VCC 2 VDD 0 12
13 BLSW

CAMERA SECTION-3 USB SIGNAL MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
MAIN P.C.B.(1/7)
MADDR L14
MADDR L10
MADDR L11
MADDR L13
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
MADDR L0
MADDR L1
MADDR L2
MADDR L3
MADDR L4
MADDR L5
MADDR L6
MADDR L7
MADDR L8
MADDR L9
XMCAS L
XMRAS L
XMWE L
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L
C10
D11
C11
D12
C11
D13
C13
D15
C14
A10
B11
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
B15
B14
D9
C9
C8
B9
A9
A8
MADDR L(0)
MADDR L(1)
MADDR L(2)
MADDR L(3)
MADDR L(4)
MADDR L(5)
MADDR L(6)
MADDR L(7)
MADDR L(8)
MADDR L(9)
MADDR L(10)
MADDR L(11)
MADDR L(13)
MADDR L(14)
XMCAS L
XMWE L
XMCAS L
XMCS L
MCLK L
MCKE L
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
17 18 19 20 68 67 59 28 71 16 25 26 27 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 24 21 22 23
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10/AP
NC2
BA0
BA1
/WE
/CAS
/RAS
/CS
CLK
CKE
DQM3
DQM2
DQM1
DQM0
DQ0 2 MDATA L0 C21 MDATA L(0)
DQ1 4 MDATA L1 B20 MDATA L(1) EADDR M(0) V22
DQ2 5 MDATA L2 C20 MDATA L(2) EADDR M(1) V23
DQ3 7 MDATA L3 D20 MDATA L(3) EADDR M(2) V24
DQ4 8 MDATA L4 A19 MDATA L(4) EADDR M(3) V25
DQ5 10 MDATA L5 B19 MDATA L(5) EADDR M(4) W22
DQ6 11 MDATA L6 D19 MDATA L(6) EADDR M(5) W23
DQ7 13 MDATA L7 A18 MDATA L(7) EADDR M(6) W24
DQ8 74 MDATA L8 B18 MDATA L(8) EADDR M(7) W25
DQ9 76 MDATA L9 C18 MDATA L(9) EADDR M(8) Y23
DQ10 77 MDATA L10 D18 MDATA L(10) EADDR M(9) Y24
DQ11 79 MDATA L11 A17 MDATA L(11) EADDR M(10) Y25
DQ12 80 MDATA L12 B17 MDATA L(12) EADDR M(11) AA22
DQ13 82 MDATA L13 D17 MDATA L(13) EADDR M(12) AA23
DQ14 83 MDATA L14 A16 MDATA L(14) EADDR M(13) AA24

IC1102
HY57V643220CTP-7 DQ15 85 MDATA L15 C16 MDATA L(15) EADDR M(14) AB25
SDRAM DQ16 31 MDATA L16 D8 MDATA L(16) EADDR M(15) AB22
DQ17 33 MDATA L17 A7 MDATA L(17) EADDR M(16) AB23
DQ18 34 MDATA L18 B7 MDATA L(18) EADDR M(17) AB24
DQ19 36 MDATA L19 C7 MDATA L(19) EADDR M(18) AC25
DQ20 37 MDATA L20 D7 MDATA L(20) EADDR M(19) AC23
DQ21 39 MDATA L21 B6 MDATA L(21) EADDR M(20) AC24
DQ22 40 MDATA L22 C6 MDATA L(22) EADDR M(21) AC25
DQ23 42 MDATA L23 D6 MDATA L(23) EADDR M(22) AD24 EADDR(0) to (22) TO
EDATA(0) to (15) AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
DQ24 45 MDATA L24 A5 MDATA L(24) EDATA M(0) AD23 MAIN P.C.B.
RDY
DQ25 47 MDATA L25 C5 MDATA L(25) EDATA M(1) AE23 XECS1
XEWRL
DQ26 48 MDATA L26 D5 MDATA L(26) EDATA M(2) AD22
XEWRU
DQ27 50 MDATA L27 B4 MDATA L(27) EDATA M(3) AE22 XERD
XDREQ
DQ28 51 MDATA L28 C4 MDATA L(28) IC1103(1/2) EDATA M(4) AC21
XDACK
DQ29 53 MDATA L29 A3 MDATA L(29) MB87M1982BGL-GE1 EDATA M(5) AD21 TRST
DIGIC DV TMS
DQ30 54 MDATA L30 B3 MDATA L(30) EDATA M(6) AE21
TCK
DQ31 56 MDATA L31 A2 MDATA L(31) EDATA M(7) AB20 MACS TDO
D+
EDATA M(8) AC20
D
EDATA M(9) AD20 USB FS EN
MACS XRST
EDATA M(10) AB19
EDATA M(11) AC19

DQ0 2 MDATA U0 U25 MDATA U(0)
EDATA M(12) AD19
DQ1 4 MDATA U1 U22 MDATA U(1)
EDATA M(13) AE19
DQ2 5 MDATA U2 T25 MDATA U(2)
EDATA M(14) AD18
EDATA M(15) AE18
DQ5 10 MDATA U5 R25 MDATA U(5)

MCCLK A W1 CARD SCK
MCDT A(3) Y4 CARD DAT3
CARD SCK TO
MCDT A(2) Y3 CARD DAT2 SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
DQ8 74 MDATA U8 R22 MDATA U(8) CARD DAT3
MAIN P.C.B.
MCDT A(1) Y2 CARD DAT1 CARD DAT2
DQ9 76 MDATA U9 P25 MDATA U(9)
CARD DAT1
MCDT A(0) Y1 CARD DAT
DQ10 77 MDATA U10 P24 MDATA U(10) CARD DAT
MCCMD A W2 CARD CMD CARD CMD
DQ11 79 MDATA U11 P23 MDATA U(11)
RDY AB16
DQ12 80 MDATA U12 N25 MDATA U(12)
XECS M AC17 XECSI
DQ13 82 MDATA U13 M24 MDATA U(13)
XEWRL M AB18 XEWRL
XEWRU M AB17 XEWRU
XERD M AC16 XERD
IC1101 DQ16 31 MDATA U16 B25 MDATA U(16)
HY57V643220CTP-7 DQ17 33 MDATA U17 C25 MDATA U(17)
DREQ (0) AC15 XDREQ
SDRAM XDACK (0) AE17 XDACK
DQ18 34 MDATA U18 D25 MDATA U(18)
TRST T2
DQ19 36 MDATA U19 A24 MDATA U(19)
TMS T3
DQ20 37 MDATA U20 B24 MDATA U(20)
TCK T1
DQ21 39 MDATA U21 C24 MDATA U(21)
TDO T4 MACS TDO
DP USB AE14 D+
DN USB AD13 D

USB FS EN
Q3502
XRESET AD1 MACS XRST

STROBE TMG(1) J2 ST STSP TO
DQ30 54 MDATA U30 A21 MDATA U(30) POWER SUPPLY SECTION
A10/AP
MAIN P.C.B.
DQM3
DQM2
DQM1
DQM0
/CAS
/RAS
CKE
NC2
CLK
BA0
BA1
/WE
MADDR U(10)
MADDR U(11)
MADDR U(13)
MADDR U(14)
/CS

A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
MADDR U(0)
MADDR U(1)
MADDR U(2)
MADDR U(3)
MADDR U(4)
MADDR U(5)
MADDR U(6)
MADDR U(7)
MADDR U(8)
MADDR U(9)
MDQM U(3)
MDQM U(2)
MDQM U(1)
MDQM C(0)
XMCAS U
XMCAS U
XMWE U
17 18 19 20 68 67 59 28 71 16 25 26 27 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 24 21 22 23
XMCS U
MCKE U
MCLK U
MADDR L10
MADDR L11
MADDR L13
MADDR L14
M23
M22
G22
G23
G24
G25
H22
H24
E25
K23
E24
E23
MDQM L(3)
MDQM L(2)
MDQM L(1)
MDQM L(0)
K25
K24
F23
F24
F25
L22
L25
L23
L24
J22
J23
J25
MADDR L0
MADDR L1
MADDR L2
MADDR L3
MADDR L4
MADDR L5
MADDR L6
MADDR L7
MADDR L8
MADDR L9
XMCAS L
XMRAS L
XMWE L
XMCS L
MCKE L
MCLK L

CAMERA SECTION-4 DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
MAIN P.C.B.(2/7)
CN2900
A11 EVF R
A12 EVF G
N.C B12 EVF B
B11 EVF COM
B1 EVF HD
CN1100
B52 EVF HD
B39 EVF COM
B42 EVF R
B43 EVF G
B44 EVF B
B30 AVDD2.7V AVDD2.7V
B32 DVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V
B58 LCD8.5V LCD8.5V
B59 LCD2.7V
B60 LCD2.7V LCD2.7V
A52 AA4.7V
A53 AA4.7V AA4.7V
A54 AA2.7V
A55 AA2.7V AA2.7V
B33 P5V
E3 RAWDATA (0)
B34 P5V P5V
A28 CAM 3V E2 RAWDATA (1)
A29 CAM 3V CAM 3V
E1 RAWDATA (2)
A30 CCD 15V CCD 15V
A31 CCD 7V CCD7V D4 RAWDATA (3)
TO A4 RAWDATA (0)
CAMERA SECTION-1 D2 RAWDATA (4)
A5 RAWDATA (1)
CAV P.C.B.
CN1001 A6 RAWDATA (2) D1 RAWDATA (5)
A7 RAWDATA (3)
C3 RAWDATA (6)
A9 RAWDATA (4)
A10 RAWDATA (5) C2 RAWDATA (7)
A11 RAWDATA (6)
C1 RAWDATA (8)
A12 RAWDATA (7)
A14 RAWDATA (8) B2 RAWDATA (9)
A15 RAWDATA (9)
B1 RAWDATA (10)
A16 RAWDATA (10)
A17 RAWDATA (11) A1 RAWDATA (11)
A19 DSP CLK
A23 VGATE F4 TGCLK
A21 XTGHD
A22 XTGVD G2 TGHD
B35 AUD2 I AUD2 I
G4 TGVD
B36 MACS1 I MACS1 I
B20 AFE RST H3 VGATE
B12 AFE CS
B11 CAM SO AUD2 I AD2 AUDO2
B10 CAM SCK
MACS1 I AE3 AUDI1
B5 PWM FA
C11
E11
Z23
C7
B6 PWM FB
B7 PWM ZA
SCS(4)/PIO
D(7)/PIO
SCLK(3)/PIO
SO(3)/PIO
B8 PWM ZB C4 PWM (3)/PIO
B14 Z PSB
D3 PWM (2)/PIO
B13 F PSB IC1103(2/2)
C3 PWM (1)/PIO
A25 Z RES SW MB87M1982BGL-CE1
A24 F RES SW
F5 PWM (0)/PIO DIGIC DV
B50 VF R EVF
B48 VF B EVF J6 PIO(2)
B49 VF G EVF
G2 PIP(3)
B38 CSYNC
B9 DA LOAD Y5 EADDR(23)/PIO
B24 LED RET TO AUD1 O Z25 AUDI O AD3 AUDI2
Y6 EADDR(24)/PIO
B28 I SW AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
IC2301(4/4) AUD1 I W21 AUDI I AE4 AUDO1
B25 TEMP E14 VF R1
B26 P GYRO LRCK V21 LRCLK AE2 LPCLK
A15 VF B1
B27 Y GYRO
WCK Y25 WCK AE1 WCLK
B21 I ENC B15 VF G1
B16 IRIS CL LREQ/PIO AA25 MACS XINTI AE16 XEINT(1)
P23 CSYNC0
B15 IRIS PSB
XEINTO/PI V3 MACS XINTO AD16 XEINT(0)
B3 PWM IRIS C8 SCS(8)/PIO
A43 A MUTE XFB IOW/PIO T3 XEWR USB AE15 XEWR USB
B23 ND ENC
W23 AUD2 I/PIO IC2301(2/4)
CCLK/PIO P2 AE10 BDATACLK
B17 ND PSB W24 SDLSEL/PIO MB87M4541BGL CCLK
TO B4 PWM ND VIC4 VCLK G1 27M AE11 VCLK

CAMERA SECTION-2 AC17 AIN3
A44 EXT DET
CAV P.C.B. VF R2 M23 VIC TDO R2 TDI
CN1001 B19 SUB CONT AB16 AIN5
A37 WCK
X15 AIN4 Q2401
B37 LRCK
Y15 AIN6 VF G2 B14 VF G LCD
Y13 SDR CKE/PIO

Q2400
AB13 XSDR WE/PIO
VF R2 A15 VF R LCD
E5 PWM(4)/PIO
W2 XECS(5)/PIO VF B2 C14 VF B LCD
AC16 AIN7
AA13 XSDR CAS/PIO
ADATA (0)
ADATA (1)
ADATA (2)
ADATA (3)
ADATA (4)
ADATA (5)
ADATA (6)
ADATA (7)
BDATA (0)
BDATA (1)
AD12 BDATA (2)
AC12 BDATA (3)
AD11 BDATA (4)
AC11 BDATA (5)
BDATA (6)
AD10 BDATA (7)

B2 PWM(5)/PIO
ADATA (1)
ADATA (2)
ADATA (3)
ADATA (4)
ADATA (5)
ADATA (6)
ADATA (7)
BDATA (0)
BDATA (3)
BDATA (5)
BDATA (6)
BDATA (7)
BDATA (4)
ADATA (0)
BDATA (2)
BDATA (1)
A4 SCS(1)/PIO
A8 AI(2)/PIO
AB10
AE13
AE12
AB11
AD9
AC9
AD8
AC8
AE9
AB9
AE8
M2
H1
M1
M3
M6
K2
K3
K5
K6
L1
L5
N1
J1
J2
J2
L6
C SYNC TO
VF R LCD SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
VF G LCD
VF B LCD

SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
MAIN P.C.B.(3/7)
11
RESET
E3V LI3V 12 VOUT
LIDET 2 25 LI3V DETECT CN103
VTR UNREG 13 VIN D100 DVDD3V DVDD3V B7 N.C
IC102 VBAT 3 LI 3V E3V+LI3V E3V+LI3V A15
E3V 14 VRO BD4207FV EPM 39 EPM A2
BACKUP CS 4 18 E3DET
CE 44
CE A3
5 SW Q100 CNVSS A4
SWOUT 6 72 CH DET CNVSS 7 FLASH CLK B2
DVDD 2.7V 7 VDC FLASH RST B3
FLASH CLK 31
FLASH RXD1 B4
FLASH RTS 32 FLASH TXD1 B5
MODE RESET A1
FLASH RXD1 30
DEBCLK A6
FLASH TXD1 29 DEBUD A8
DEBDD A10
MODE RESET 10 XDEBEN A12
CG CS B8
EEP/CG CLK B9
EEP/CG SO B10
DOT CLK B11
OSD I0 B12
OSD I1 B13
VIC HD B14
VIC VD B15
11 XOUT DC JDET 71 VIC VD TO

VIC HD AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
X101 MAIN P.C.B.
OSD I1
10MHz
RMC PULSE IN 16 OSD I0
13 XIN DOT CLK
IC100 XRESET 49
CG SO
M30620MCN CG CLK
MODE MI-COM. CGCS
8 XCIN XDEBEN
EJECT SWITCH 66
DEBDD
X100 VTOS EN 17 DEBUD
32.768KHz
STOV CS DEBCLK
VIC3 CS 48
9 XCOUT MODE RESET
VTOS SCK
VIC3 CLOCK 35 DC J DET
VTOS DATA RMC IN
VIC3 TO SUBCOM DATA 34
XRESET TO
STOV DATA
SUBCOM TO VIC3 DATA 33 EJECT SW AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1
TO MAIN P.C.B.
POWER SUPPLY SECTION CAM ON 53 CAM ON VTOS PC
MAIN P.C.B. VTOS PC 1
CHARGE VTOS EN
41 CHARGE
INIT CHARGE1 VTOS ACTIVE 24 STOV CS
DC V DET 99 INIT CHARGE1 VTOS SCK
MTOC MODE2 59
VTR ON VTOS DATA
80 DC V DET
A/D I MTOC MODE1 58 STOV DATA
A/D V 52 VTR ON VTOS ACTIVE
MTOC MODE0 57
BATT INFO AD STOV MODE2
90 A/D I
ADV MIC L NTSC XPAL 40 STOV MODE1
ADV/EXT MIC R 89 A/D V STOV MODE0
CASSETTE IN SWITCH 67
NTSC XPAL
88 BATT INFO A/D
CASSETTE MEMORY A/D0 84 CAS IN TO
SERVO SECTION
MIC 1 MAIN P.C.B.
CASSETTE MEMORY A/D1 85 MIC 2
VTR UNREG 87 BATT A/D MIC 3
CASSETTE MEMORY SDA 28
MIC ON
E3V 96 VREF CASSETTE MEMORY A/D2 86 ZOOM KEY
VTR POW SW
CASSETTE MEMORY SDL 27
E3V+LI3V 97 AVCC CAM POW SW
CASSETTE MEMORY ON 26 CARD DET
60 VCC2 CARD PRO
CARD ACCESS LED
14 VCC1
CN1100
TO
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAV P.C.B.
A1
B1
ADV/EXT MIC R
ADV MIC L KEY P.C.B.
CN 1001 B54 SP
19 EVF SEN
B55 SP +
TO B53 LCD EEP SCK 55 EVF 3V ON KEY AD3 95 BT100
CAMERA SECTION-2 B46 LCD EEP SOUT KEY AD3
CAV P.C.B. DIAL CW SWITCH 42
CN 1001 B47 EVF SEN DIAL-CW
B56 EVF 3V ON DIAL CCW SWITCH 43 DIAL-CCW BT101
A49 EVF 8.5V ON 20 EVF 8.5V ON CHAGE LED TO LITHIUM
A48 LCD EEP SIN1 Q102
MAIN P.C.B. BATTERY
CN102 CN101 CN100
CARD ACCESS LED 24 49 CARD DAT3 MMC VDD 4
68 PHOTO SWITCH CARD PRO 16 48 CARD CMD MMC RSV 1
CN100 CHAGE LED 50 CARD DET 15 46 CARD SCK MMC CMD 2 SD CARD
TO 1 SP1 69 HARF PHOTO SWITCH VTR UNREG VTR UNREG 47 43 CARD DAT2 MMC SCK 5
SPEAKER 2 SP2 + VTR UNREG 46 42 CARD DAT MMC DAT 7
FPC UNIT
4 CK 3V DVDD2.7V 23 KEY LED0 VTR UNREG 45 40 CARD DAT1 MMC DAT1 8
LCD ON
8 P5V P5V LCD ON 47 DVDD2.7V DVDD2.7V 14 37 DVDD2.7V MMC DAT2 9
Q105
6 PICT SW 54 PRINT SW LCD EEP SIN1 LCD8.5V LCD8.5V 37 36 CARD DET CARD PRO 10
LCD EEP SIN 4
7 KAY LED0 LCD5V LCD5V 36 35 CARD PRO CARD DET 12
LCD EEP SCK SW103
9 HALF PHOTO SW LCD EEP SCK 5 LCD2.7V 35 34 DVDD3V
10 PHOTO SW LCD EEP SOUT LCD2.5V LCD2.7V 34 32 KEY AD0 STOP
LCD EEP SOUT 3 SW100
5 ZOOM AD LCDD3V DVDD3V 17 31 KEY AD1
PANEL EEP CS DATA/SELF
PANEL EEP CS 61 LCD BL ON 44 30 KEY AD2 SW104
LCD CS LCD ON 43 29 KEY AD4 LED100 PLAY
LCD CS 63
CN101 LCD EEP SIN1 42 28 LI 3V SW101
KEY AD4
TO 7 GPN/P AE 75 PAE/GREEN SW KEY AD4 82 LCD EEP SCK 41 27 CARD ACCESS LED CARD MIX
OPERATION 6 TAPE/CARD SW KEY AD2 LCD EEP SOUT 40 25 PNL OP SW SW105 CN102
KEY UNIT 78 TAPE/CARD SW KEY AD2 93 FF
4 START/STOP SW LCD EEP CS 39 24 PNL B/T SW LCD BL ON 20
KEY AD1 SW102
3 CAM PW SW 70 START/STOP KEY AD1 92 LCD CS 38 23 PANEL R LCD ON 19
2 VTR PW SW KEY AD0 PNL B/T SW 27 22 PANEL G REW LCD EEP SIN1 18
51 NET POWER SW KEY AD0 91
1 NET PW SW PNL OP SW 26 21 PANEL B LCD EEP SCK 17
PNL B/T SW
77 CAM POWER SWITCH PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SWITCH 65 KEY AD4 22 18 C SYNC LCD EEP SOUT 16
SW110 SW106
PNL OP SW KEY AD2 21 17 LCD2.7V LCD EEP CS 15
PANEL OPEN SWITCH 64 AEB/REC DE ON/OFF
76 VTR POWER SWITCH KEY AD1 20 16 LCD2.7V LCD CS 14
CHAGE LED PAUSE
CHAGE LED 50 KEY AD0 19 15 LCD5V C SYNC 9
TO C SYNC 33 14 LCD8.5V SW107 PANEL B 5
CAMERA SECTION-4 C SYNC PANEL B 30 13 LCD CS DE SEL PANEL G 4
MAIN P.C.B. VF B LCD PANEL G 29 12 LCD EEP CS PANEL R 3
VF G LCD PANEL R 28 11 LCD EEP SOUT PNL B/T SW 1
SW109 SW108
VF R LCD LI3V LI 3V 23 10 LCD EEP SCK VTR UNREG 23
CARD DAT1 CARD DAT1 11 9 LCD EEP SIN1 END SEARCH VTR UNREG 22
TO
CAMERA SECTION-3 CARD DAT CARD DAT 9 8 LCD ON VTR UNREG 21
MAIN P.C.B. CARD SCK CARD DAT2 8 7 LCD BL ON LCD8.5V 13
CARD DAT3 CARD SCK 5 6 VTR UNREG LCD3V 11
CARD CMD CARD CMD 3 5 VTR UNREG LCD3V 10
CARD DAT2 CARD DAT3 2 4 VTR UNREG LCD5V 12 TO LCD P.C.B. SECTION
LCD P.C.B.
CN901

SERVO SECTION MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL

DMC III
MAIN P.C.B. (4/7)
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL CN300
DRUM
D.W 37 W 10
W 11
MOTOR
D.V 35 V 3
V 4
D.U 34 U 1
U 2
PG
D.COM 33 COIL COM 9
DPG 6 FG
DFG 5
D VM D VM 28 D.VM D.PGIN 20 SENS COM 7
D VS
TO C VM D VS 29 D.VS D.FGPGIN+ 19
POWER SUPPLY SECTION C VS
MAIN P.C.B. 60 C.VM D.FGIN 18
C VS 61 C.VS CN302 CAPSTAN

C H 7 MOTOR
Q306 C.HW 12 W 8
W+ 9
CFG 15 C.FGSMT C.HW+ 11 C H+ 10
U+ 11
DPG 16 D.PGSMT C.HU+ 10 U 12
V+ 13
DFG 21 D.FGSMT C.HU 9 V 14
CFG2 15 FG
30 D.EC C.HV+ 8 CFG1 18
U COIL 1
40 L.FRB IC301 C.HV 7 U COIL 2
BD6636KV W COIL 3
41 L.REF MOTOR DRIVE C.FGIN 14 W COIL 4
Q304 V COIL 5
57 D.PS C.FGIN+ 13 V COIL 6
LOADING
DVDD 2.7V CFG VCC 17
MOTOR
58 C.PS C.U 2
59 C.FBR C.V 3
62 C.EC C.W 5
DEW SENSOR
TO CN301
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 CAP VS CNT VTR UNREG 27 UNREG L.REV 44 LOAD () 6
MAIN P.C.B. CFG LOAD () 7 MODE SW
DPG DVDD 2.7V 22 VCC L.FWD 42 LOAD (+) 1
DFG LOAD (+) 2
DERR P 5V 45 L.VM R.IN1+ 46 DEW+ 8
LMO FRBL MSW SENS 5
LMO FRBH R.IN1 47 DVDD 2.7V MSW VCC 4
LODE ON MSW VSS 3
DRUM ON 48 ROUT1 R.IN2+ 49
CAP ON
CAP FWD 51 ROUT2 R.IN2 50
CERR
T REEL FG TAPE END
S REEL FG SENSOR
DA CFG
DEW
MSW AD TAPE TOP
TAPE TOP CN303 SENSOR
TAPE END BOT DET BOT E 1
TAPE LED DVDD 2.7V BOT C 2
Q303
REC PROOF EOT DET EOT E 20
REEL LED CONT EOT C 21
Q303 Q301
DA TREEL P 5V LED A 14
DA SREEL LED K 15
CAS IN REC PRF 5 SAFETY
MIC3 4 SW
Q300 MIC2 6
MIC1 7
C IN 12
T IN 8 MIC
Q305 DVDD 2.7V T IN+ 10
CAS IN T OUT 9
MIC1 T OUT+ 11
CASSETTE IN SW
MIC2 S IN 16
TO MIC3 S IN+ 18
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION MIC ON S OUT 17
MAIN P.C.B. S OUT+ 19
MIC2
TO MIC3
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 DA CFG 3 FG TAKE UP
MAIN P.C.B. REEL
1
IC300
NJM12904R 2
OPE AMP
7
6 FG SUPPLY
REEL
5

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
ELURA70 A
ELURA65 A
MVX250i E
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL DM-FV M100
ONLY
Q2311
MAIN P.C.B. (5/7) WIDE DET
AC14 AIN13
TO EXT RDY1/PI T6 RDY

E18 VRH1
CAMERA SECTION-3 D
MAIN P.C.B. XECS(1)/PIO X1 XECS1
D+
C12 AGC PWM
Q3501 XEWRL X12 XEWRL
W1 XECS(4)/PIO
CN2101 EDREQ/PIO V5 XDREQ
TO F9 SCS(6)/PIO
JACK1,2 SECTION 26 VTR UNREG VTR UNREG EDACK/PIO W5 XDACK
JACK1 P.C.B. 9 AVDD 2.7V AVDD2.7V P5 CDATA(5)/PIO
CN51 SCS(9)/PIO B7 USB FS EN
21 P5V P5V
B12 CLAMP PWM
17 D SI(3)/PIO E10 MACS XRST
15 D+ B19 VRH2
EDATA (0) AB11
20 VBUS
A12 ACC PWM
7 AV DET Q2310 AA11
8 CAM LED F17 C IN
X11
5 V I/O/HP R
C18 Y IN
3 AV R AC10
2 AV L/HP L B20 COMP IN
AB10
12 P GY OUT
10 Y GY OUT AA10
A5 SCS(5)/PIO
24 RMC IN Q3503
25 CHARGE LED AVDD1.4V IC2301 (3/4) Y10
23 DC J SW
LETTER CONT
R1 CDATA(6)/PIO MB87M4541BGL X10
Q2309
Q2313 VIC4
AC9
AVDD2.7V
AB9
P3 CDATA(4)/PIO
WIDE CONT AA9
R3 CDATE(7)/PIO
HA4.7V Y9
E15 BYPASS
Q2308 X9
AC8
A19 C FB
CN2102 AB8
TO C16 Y FB
JACK1,2 SECTION 7 S DET EDATA (15) AA8
JACK2 P.C.B. E16 COMP FB
6 Y I/O
CN91
2 C I/O B17 C O FROM
10 EJECT SW AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2
A18 Y O IC2301 (4/4)
13 KEY AD3
12 DIAL-CCW B18 COMP O
11 DIAL-CW
XECS(2)/PIO
SCLK(2)/PIO
EADDR (22)
M24 TDI
SCS(3)/PIO
AA7 EADDR (0)

SO(2)/PIO
AC25 D(4)/PIO
X21 D(5)/PIO
LINE IN
XECS(0)
XRESET
LPS/PIO
AA12 XEWRU
SOUND
PIO (5)
F7 UNT CLKI/PIO
AMCK
XERD
TRST
AB17 AIN1
AB15 AIN9
M25 TMS
TCK
TO KEY AD3
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION 75 75 75
DIAL-CW
MAIN P.C.B.
AC6
AC3
AC2
AC5
AC1
AA6
AB5
AB4
AB1
AA1
AA3
AB6
AA5
AA4
AB3
AB2
AA2
N25
N20
Y16
X23
B11
B10
X24
W5
DIAL-CCW
W6
Y7
X7
Y3
E1
A1
X2
V2
Y1
Z1
F8
Q2305 Q2306 Q2307
DC J DET
Q2312
CHAGE LED
SI VDHGL VL
RMC IN
REC MUTE
SHOE ID1
SHOE ID2
SHOE ON
AIF SCLK
HP MUTE
EJECT SW
AIF SO
AIF CS
HP ON
XPDI
XRESET Q3504
CN2900
B9 TDI
B8 TMS
A7 TCK
B10 TDO
N.C A1 V I/O
B7 TRST
B5 MIC2
B6 MIC3 EADDR (0) E1 A0
B3 VTR ON IC3201
EADDR (1) D1
EADDR (2) C1 DO0 E2 EDATA (0)
TO EADDR (3) A1 H2 EDATA (1)

VTR ON IC3201
POWER SUPPLY SECTION
MAIN P.C.B. SHOE ID1 EADDR (4) B1 E3 EDATA (2)
SHOE ID2
EADDR (5) D2 H3 EDATA (3)
SHOE ON
ST VDHGL VL EADDR (6) C2 H4 EDATA (4)
EADDR (7) A2 E4 EDATA (5)
EADDR (8) B5 H5 EDATA (6)

TO MIC2
SERVO SECTION EADDR (9) A5 E5 EDATA (7)
MAIN P.C.B. MIC3
DA CFG EADDR (10) C5 F2 EDATA (8)
EADDR (11) D5 G2 EDATA (9)

TO
CN1100 IC2300
CAMERA SECTION-2 B18 DA CFG EADDR (12) B6 MX29LV160ABXEI F3 EDATA (10)
CAV P.C.B.
CN1001
B29 P GY OUT
EADDR (13) A6 FLASH G3 EDATA (11)
TO B31 Y GY OUT
CAMERA SECTION-1 A60 AV R EADDR (14) C6 F4 EDATA (12)
CAV P.C.B. A59 AV L/HP L
CN1001 EADDR (15) D6 G5 EDATA (13)
A58 V I/O/HP R
A46 SOUND EADDR (16) E6 F5 EDATA (14)
A39 AIF CS
EADDR (17) B2 DO15 G6 EDATA (15)
A36 AMCK
A45 HP MUTE EADDR (18) C3
A41 XPDI
EADDR (19) D4 A19
A42 REC MUTE RDY
A40 AIF SCLK EADDR (20) D3 NC3 XECS1
A38 AIF SO XEWRL
A47 HP ON F1 CE XDREQ
XDACK
G1 OE USB FS EN
MACS XRST
A4 WE MACS TDO
TCK
B4 RESET TMS
EDATA (0) to (15)
EADDR (0) to (22)
XERD
XEWRU TO
TRST CAMERA SECTION-3
MAIN P.C.B.

AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 MVX250i E,MVX200i E,MVX200 E
DIGITAL DV SIGNAL DIGITAL (VIDEO+AUDIO SIGNAL) DRUM SERVO SIGNAL CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B. (6/7)

SDRAM
2.7V CN2102
MDATA (0)
DQ0 2 K21 MDATA (0) TPA AB19 XTPB 18 TO
MDATA (1) TPB 19 JACK 1,2 SECTION
DQ1 4 K20 MDATA (1) XTPA AA18 JACK2 P.C.B.
1 VDD1 XTPA 17 CN91
MDATA (2)
DQ2 5 J23 MDATA (2) TPB AC20 TPA 16
3 VDDQ1
MDATA (3)
DQ3 7 J20 MDATA (3) XTPB AB20
9 VDDQ2
MDATA (4)
DQ4 8 H25 MDATA (4)
14 VDD2
MDATA (5)
DQ5 10 H24 MDATA (5) VIC VD
27 VDD3 VD N21 VIC VD TO
MDATA (6) SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION
DQ6 11 H26 MDATA (6) VIC HD VIC HD
43 VDDQ3 HD R25 MAIN P.C.B.
MDATA (7) OSD I0
DQ7 13 H21 MDATA (7) OSD I0
49 VDDQ4 OSD I(0)/PI N24 OSD I1
MDATA (8)
DQ8 42 F21 MDATA (8) OSD I1 DOT CLK
OSD I(1)/PI N23
MDATA (9) STOV MODE0
DQ9 44 F23 MDATA (9) DOT CLK
DOTCLK/PIO P25 STOV MODE1
MDATA (10)
DQ10 45 F24 MDATA (10) STOV MODE0 STOV MODE2
D(0)/PIO W20
MDATA (11) CG CS
DQ11 47 F25 MDATA (11) STOV MODE1
D(1)/PIO AB25 STOV CS
MDATA (12)
DQ12 48 G20 MDATA (12) STOV MODE2 ZOOM KEY
D(2)/PIO AA24
MDATA (13) CARD DET
DQ13 50 G21 MDATA (13) CG CS
CTL(1)/PIO Y21 CARD PRO
MDATA (14)
DQ14 51 G25 MDATA (14) STOV CS CARD ACCESS LED
SYSCLK/PIO AB24
MDATA (15) VTOS EN
DQ15 53 H20 MDATA (15) ZOOM KEY
AIN12 AA16 VTOS SCK
ADDR (0)
A0 23 E19 ADDR (0) CARD DET VTOS DATA
XESC(3)/PIO X5
ADDR (1) STOV DATA
A1 24 F19 ADDR (1) CARD PRO
XEINT2/PI U6 XDEBEN
ADDR (2)
A2 25 C20 ADDR (2) CARD ACCESS LED
IC2302 PIO(6) H6
DEBUD
ADDR (3) DEBDD
EM668165TS-7G A3 26 E20 ADDR (3) VTOS EN
SCS(0)/PIO E7 DEBCLK
SDRAM A4 29
ADDR (4)
C21 ADDR (4) VTOS SCK NTSC XPAL
UAT CLKO/PIO A3
ADDR (5) CG SO
A5 30 A22 ADDR (5) VTOS DATA
TX/PIO C6 CG CLK
ADDR (6)
A6 31 B22 ADDR (6) STOV DATA VTOS ACTIVE
RX/PIO B3
ADDR (7) VTOS PC
A7 32 C22 ADDR (7) XDEBEN
XDEBEN R6 VTR POW SW
ADDR (8)
A8 33 A23 ADDR (8) DEBUD MODE RESET
DEBUD R5
ADDR (9) CAM POW SW
A9 34 B23 ADDR (9) DEBDD
DEBDD T2 FCH 0
A10/AP 22
ADDR (10)
A24 ADDR (10) IC2301(4/4) DEBCLK
DEBCLK T1
ADDR (11) MB87M4541BGL
A11 35 A25 ADDR (11) NTSC XPAL
VIC4 PIO(4) H5
ADDR (12)
BA1 21 B24 ADDR (12) CG SO
SO(1)/PIO F11
ADDR (13)
BA0 20 B25 ADDR (13) CG CLK
SCLK(1)/PIO F12 CN2900
DQML
LDQM 15 E24 DQML VTOS ACTIVE VTR POW SW A3
SCLK(0)/PIO A10
XWE MODE RESET B2
/WE 16 E25 XWE VTOS PC
SO(0)/PIO A9 CAM POW SW A5
XCAS NC
/CAS 17 D24 XCAS FCH 0 A6
XRAS SWP A8
/RAS 18 D23 XRAS
PBRF A10
XCS
/CS 19 C23 XCS
CKE
CKE 37 C24 CKE HA 3.3V HA 4.7V
REC H X25
MCLK
CLK 38 D25 MCLK
DQMU
UDQM 39 E23 DQMU 36 5 38
CAP VS CNT REC CONT
X8 EADDR(8)/PIO
UTIL SWP(5) A14 32
REC IC2000
ON
LMO FRBL
G3 PIO(8) LD502W
LMO FRBH RDAT U20 35 VRP2 H1A
D1 PIO(9) 46
LOAD ON
B5 SCS(3)/PIO H1B
45 CN2000
CAP ON
E2 PIO(7) H1A 2 CH-1 CH-2
H2A HEAD HEAD
DRUM ON 43 H1B 3
W3 BRQ/PIO
REC PROOF XRDAT U21 34 H2B
H2A 5 DRUM
E3 TCLK/PI 42 H2B 6 UNIT
REEL LED CONT
V6 BGRNTX/PIO
TO DA CFG
SERVO SECTION CAP VS CNT B2 PWM(5)/PIO
MAIN P.C.B. LMO FRBL DA SREEL
E6 PWM(7)/PIO
LMO FRBH
DA TREEL
LOAD ON A2 PWM(6)/PIO
CAP ON TAPE TOP
AA14 AIN14
DRUM ON
TAPE END PB ON
REC PROOF AB14 AIN15 PB H V24 1
Q2000
REEL LED CONT MSW AD
AA15 AIN10
DA CFG 6
DEW
DA SREEL AC15 AIN11
DA TREEL CAS IN CTL(0)/PIO AA22
Y14 AIN12
TAPE TOP
T REEL FG
TAPE END P21 RFGT/PI
VIDEO SIGNAL
MSW AD S REEL FG TO 21
R23 RFGS/PI
DEW AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION1
DERR IC2301 (3/4) GCA
CAS IN R24 PWMD
T REEL FG CERR AUDIO SIGNAL PBRF K25 17 EPH GDL EQ VCO
R20 PWMC TO
S REEL FG
CFG CAMERA SECTION4
DERR U25 CFG IC2301 (2/4) SWP T21 2
CERR DPG
R21 DPG
CFG
DFG
UTIL SWP (4)
UTIL SWP (3)
UTIL SWP (1)

UTIL SWP (2)
UTIL SWP (0)
DPG T24 DFG

DFG CAP FWD
P24 CAPDIR/PIO
29 30 13 11 12 28 8 25 26 22 23
XRCLK
CAP FWD
RAGC
RAPC
RCLK
TAPE LED
TAPE LED AA23 D(6)/PIO
U24
U23
C13
V25
B13
A13
F14
F13
L24
GDH CONT
GDH CONT
GDL CONT
GDL CONT
EQ CONT
EQ CONT
XRCLK
XRCLK
RAGC
RAPC
EQFC
RAGC
RAFC
RCLK
RAPC
EQFC
RAFC
RCLK

POWER SUPPLY SECTION MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.(7/7)
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL CN891
ADV/EXT MIC R 12 TO
ADV MIC L 11 SHOE CONNECTOR
ELURA70 A ID-2 9
ELURA65 A ST STSP
ST VDHGL
8
7
MVX250i E ID-1 6
DM-FV M100 FU3205 SHOE UNREG

SHOE UNREG
2
1
ONLY Q3209
TO
ADV/EXT MIC R SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION-3
ADV MIC L MAIN P.C.B.
ST STSP TO
CN3201 SHOE ID1 CAMERA SECTION-3
TO FU3201 MAIN P.C.B.
JACK1,2 SECTION 2 DC + ST VDHGL VL
Q3210
JACK1 P.C.B. 1 DC FU3202 SHOE ID2
CN3211 FU1810 SHOE ON TO
FU3203 MAIN P.C.B.
C VS TO
D VS SERVO SECTION
MAIN P.C.B.
Q1801
VTR UNREG
34 OSC
46 LPF MACS 1.4V
CH1 LPF DVDD 1.4V

Q3204
1.4V (CH1)
33 5 4
LPF AVDD 1.4V
2
Q1814 50
Q1813 27 VCC
1 3
TO
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION DC V DET DVDD 2.7V
MAIN P.C.B. A/D I
A/D V DIF 2.7V
BATT INFO AD
CAM ON SDRAM 2.7V
CHARGE
INIT CHARGE1 43 AVDD 2.7V
VTR ON
LPF AA 2.7V
CH2 Q3203
2.7V (CH2)
5 4
M SDRAM 2.7V
2
53
LPF LCD 2.7V
TO CN3202
BATTERY TERMIANL 3 BATT INFO AD 1 3
1 BATT Q1815
2 BATT
4 BATT + 15 2 3 40
5 BATT +
HA 3V
OUTPUT IC1810 CH3 Q3205
3V (CH3)
DRIVE MB3833A-E1 5 4
LPF CAM 3V
14 VCC CHARGE 56
2
IC DVDD 3V
Q1812
1 3
DSC POWER
SAVE
IC3201 37
12 13 7 8 MB3881 IC3203
DC/DC CH4 Q3206 5 V IN TK11147CS V OUT 4 AA 4.7V
CONVERTER P5V (CH4)
5 4 4.7V REGULATOR
HA 4.7V
2
57
LPF LCD 5V
1 3 P 5V
21
3 2 1 CH5 Q3207 D VM TO
DRUM VS (CH5) C VM SEEVO SECTION
IC1811 5 4 MAIN P.C.B.
MM3012XN 22 60
2
OPE AMP
4
1 3
15
CH6 Q3208
CAP VS (CH6)
5 4
2
16 61
1 3
11
ON/OFF T3202
CONT. CH7 D3205
4
28 CH1,3,4,8 5 CCD 7V
TO 62
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 VTR ON IC3201 30 CH5,6 Q3201 3 6
MAIN P.C.B.
31 CH7
2 7
29 CH2 D3203
5
1 8 CCD 15V
CH8
64 D3202
Q3202
LCD 8.5V

LCD P.C.B. SECTION MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
DATA COMMUNICATION
LCD P.C.B.
VTR UNREG
VTR UNREG
5 T4201
Q4201
SWITCH
ON
1 CONTROL 4 2 7
Q903
LCD 5V VCC5V 3
3 4
IC4201
1
R1223N152H
DC/DC 2 1 5 6
CONVERTER VTR UNREG 3 5
CONTROL 6 4 Q4202
3 DRIVER
4
LCD 2.7V
1 5 2
Q4203 WP4201
Q902
BACK LIGHT
Q901 Q4204 WP4202
VTR UNREG
BL CONTROL
LCD 8.5V VCC 5V
CN901 LCD 5V
4 VTR UNREG 18 29 36 41
5 VTR UNREG LCD 2.7V
VDD1
VDD2
VCC2
DA OUT
5 VCC1-1
6 VTR UNREG
14 LCD 8.5V
43 VCC1-2
15 LCD 5V
16 LCD 2.7V
17 LCD 2.7V 45 R/R-Y R OUT 34
8 LCD ON
7 LCD BL ON
44 G/Y G OUT 35
24 PANEL R
23 PANEL G
22 PANEL B 46 B/B-Y B OUT 33 CN902
18 C SYNC VDD 18
LCS
13 LCD CS RED 4
ECS
12 LCD EEP CS GREEN 5
SO
11 LCD EEP SOUT BLUE 3
CLK
10 LCD EEP SCK VST 24 VST 22
SO
9 LCD EEP SIN1 VCK 21
E CS VCK 23
26 PANEL BT SW 1 CS EN 20
TO
SYSTEM CONTROL SECTION 27 PANEL BT SW CLK IC901 IC902 EN 22 DWN 19
2 SK
KEY P.C.B.
BR9010RFV-W VCC 8 LCD 2.7V CXM3009TQ XSTBY 14
CN102 SO DWN 21
3 DI EEPROM 47 SYNCIN LCD DRIVE PCG 13
SO XSTB 20 HST 12
4 DO
WIDE 9
PCG 19
HCK2 8
HST 17 HCK1 7
RGT 2
WIDE 16
REF 11
CHK2 15 COM 24 LCD UNIT
L CS CS 23
6 SEN CHK1 14
PSIG 6 LCD
CLK
7 SCK RGT 13
SO REF 42
8 SDAT
CN903
COM-DC 38
1 PANEL BT SW
TO
LCD DETECT FPC 3 LCD2.7V LCD 2.7V
PSIG OUT 37
PDF
26
LCD 8.5V
Q904

JACK1,2 SECTION MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL USB SIGNAL
JACK1 P.C.B.
CN42
TO
CAMERA SECTION-1 1 EXT L
CAV P.C.B.
CN701
3
4
ADV/EXT MIC R
EXT P DET
ELURA70 A
6 INT MIC R MIC JACK ELURA65 A
8 INT MIC L MVX250i E
DM-FV M100
CN43 LED62 CN41 ONLY
TO 2 INT MIC R VTR UNREG
MIC UNIT
4 INT MIC L
ELURA70 A RU71
ELURA65 A REMOTE CONTROLER

P5V 2 VCC
P5V
MVX250i E
LED61
DM-FV M100 1 VO
TO
CN51 ONLY
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 2 CHAGE LED
MAIN P.C.B. 3 RMC IN
CN2101
4 DC J SW CN3551
7 VBUS VBUS (+5V) 1
10 D D 2
12 D+ D+ 3
15 P GY OUT
17 Y GY OUT
19 CAM LED USB JACK
20 AV DET IC1601
22 V I/O/HP R 2 OUT ENC-03MA VCC 1 AVDD2.7V
24 AV R P SENSOR GYRO
25 AV L/HP L
IC1602
2 OUT ENC-03MB VCC 1 AVDD2.7V
Y SENSOR GYRO
AV JACK
CN81
CN3211
TO
POWER SUPPLY SECTION 1 DC+
MAIN P.C.B. 2 DC
CN3201 DC JACK
CN3212
CN11
XTPB 1
TPB 2
XTPA 3
DV JACK
TPA 4
CN91
TO PUSH
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-2 2 TPB
MAIN P.C.B. 3 XTPB
CN2102
4 XTPA
TO 5 TPA
AUDIO-VIDEO SECTION-1 8 KEY AD3 SW22
MAIN P.C.B. 9 DIAL CCW
CN2102 MENU
10 DIAL CW SW21
11 EJECT SW
14 S DET SW23
15 Y I/O EJECT ON
19 C I/O
Y C
S JACK
G1 G2
CN31

Canon Mvx200 Mvx250i-Sm

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Canon Mvx200 Mvx250i-Sm

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Video Product

1-1 Main Features

1-1-1 Easy Direct Button

Easy Direct Button

Print setup information is

Pressing the Direct button

Visually check that

Connection to The Transfer menu is

1-2 Product Specifications Comparison Chart

Specifications MVX250i E MVX200i E, MVX200 E

*1 : Not applicable to MVX200 E

1-3 Function and Performance List

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Item MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

2-1-1 Design Concept-1

<Parallel Layout Design>

2-1-2 Design Concept-2

<Distinctive Body Design>

<Brilliant Metallic Color>

<Easy Direct Buttons>

2-1-3 Differences in Appearance of Overseas Models MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Model MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Bluish, high-brilliance metallic finish

2-2 18 zoom lens

2-2-1 Features of 18 lens

2-2-2 New technologies and new functions

Lens incorporated in MVX250i E, MVX200i E, MVX200 E

Lens incorporated in MVX3i E

2-3 Easy Direct Button ([ ] Print/Share button)

2-3-1 Direct Print function

Direct printer connection

Press the button

Press the SETUP button (Press the MENU button)

Press the SETUP button

Button operation guide

The procedure for previous models is shown below.

2-3-2 Direct Transfer

The Transfer menu has the following five options.

Function Operation Description

Startup condition 4 Startup conditions 2 and 3 Button turns off

Select Image screen

Function Operation Description

SELECT &TRANSFER : See 2.3.2.5

No Image Warning screen

2-3-2-2 ALL IMAGES

Confirm Transfer screen Button lights up

Function Operation Description

Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar)

Function Operation Description

Button turns off

Return to Menu screen

2-3-2-3 NEW IMAGES

Confirm Transfer screen Button lights up

Function Operation Description

Transfer in Progress screen (with progress bar)

Function Operation Description

Return to Menu screen

2-3-2-4 TRANSFER ORDERS

Confirm Transfer screen

Cancel OK Button turns off

Analyzing Send-designated Images screen